Keyboard Shortcuts
REPRESENTATION FOR PARTS Wire frame CTRL + 1 Shaded wire frame CTRL + 2 Rendered (black) CTRL + 3 Rendered CTRL + 4 Rendered (dark colors) CTRL + 5 REPRESENTATION FOR COMPONENT PARTS Wire frame SHIFT + 1 Shaded wire frame SHIFT + 2 Rendered (black) SHIFT + 3 Rendered SHIFT + 4 Rendered (dark colors) SHIFT + 5 GENERAL SHORTCUTS Open Save Properties Undo Redo Interrupt Repeat the last command Copy CHANGED! Move CHANGED! Delete Drag and drop Pan Middle button pan CHANGED! Move right Move left Move down Move up Center by cursor Zoom original Zoom in/out Zoom previous Rotate using mouse Rotate using keyboard Ortho Relative coordinate input Absolute coordinate input Next position Previous position Xsnap SmartSelect Select filter Add to selection Toggle selection Lock X, Y or Z coordinates
CTRL + O CTRL + S ALT + ENTER CTRL + Z CTRL + Y ESC ENTER CTRL + C CTRL + M DEL D P SHIFT + M x z y w INS HOME PG UP/PG DN END CTRL + R CTRL + arrow keys, SHIFT + arrow keys O @, R $, A TAB SHIFT + TAB T S CTRL + G SHIFT CTRL X, Y or Z
Select all select switch Select parts select switch Snap to reference lines/points Snap to geometry lines/points Snap to nearest points Snap to any position Advanced options Inquire object Free measure
F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 CTRL + E SHIFT + I F
MODELING SHORTCUTS Create new model Open the Views list Create clip plane Rollover highlight Set view rotation point Autorotate CHANGED! Disable view rotation 3D / Plane Fly (in perspective views) Select all Select assembly Hide object Snapshot Undo last polygon pick Finish polygon input Open component catalog Create AutoConnection Phase manager Clash check Drawing Wizard Drawing list Clone drawing Print drawings Create report
CTRL + N CTRL + I SHIFT + X H V SHIFT + R, SHIFT + T F8 CTRL + P SHIFT + F CTRL + A ALT + object SHIFT + H F9, F10, F11, F12 Backspace Space bar CTRL + F CTRL + J CTRL + H SHIFT + C CTRL + W CTRL + L CTRL + D SHIFT + P CTRL + B
DRAWING SHORTCUTS SHIFT + A Associative symbol Black and white drawing B Ghost outline SHIFT + G Open next drawing CTRL + PG DN Open previous drawing CTRL + PG UP Create an orthogonal dimension G USER COORDINATE SYSTEM (UCS) SHORTCUTS Set coordinate system origin U Set coordinate system by two points SHIFT + U Toggle orientation CTRL + T Reset current CTRL + 1 Reset all CTRL + 0
Keyboard Shortcuts
DEFINING SHORTCUTS If you frequently use certain commands, assign keyboard shortcuts to them. You will find it faster than using the icons and menus. To assign a shortcut to a command: • Click Tools > Customize... to open the Customize dialog box. • Click on the command on the list on the left. • Use the Filter list box to find commands easily. Click the down arrow to select subgroups of commands. ALL displays all the commands available in Tekla Structures. You can also type in the command name to search for commands. • Use the Shortcut fields to assign a shortcut to the command. You can use a single letter, or combine a letter with the Shift, Alt or Ctrl key. • Move the command to the Menu list by clicking the right arrow. This will activate the shortcut and also add the command in the User menu. • Click Close to exit the Customize dialog box. For more information, see Online help, Appendix E > Reserved shortcuts.
Basic Modeling 1
Tekla Structures 12.0 Basic Training September 19, 2006 Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
Contents
Contents
3
1
5
Basic Modeling 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8
Start Tekla Structures Create a New Model – BasicModel1 Create Grids Create Plane Views along Gridlines Create Foundations Create Columns Create Beams Create Slabs
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
6 7 10 12 16 21 26 41
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1
3
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1
4
1
In this lesson
Basic Modeling 1
We will go through the basic functions of Tekla Structures: How to create a new structural 3D model, and how to create grids (i.e. module lines), grid views and structural members in the model. As a result of this lesson the model will look as shown below.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1
5
1.1 Start Tekla Structures Start Tekla Structures
To start Tekla Structures, click the Windows Start button. Navigate through Programs > Tekla Structures > Tekla Structures enu Europe. This will start Tekla Structures in European environment using English language.
The modeling user interface is now opened. At first, most of the menu options and all the icons are gray indicating that they are inactive. When you open an existing model or create a new model, the icons and available menu options become active.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1
6
1.2 Create a New Model – BasicModel1 To start a new model, you first need to create an empty model database with a unique name. In this lesson use the name BasicModel1. Start a new model
1.
Select File > New… from the pull-down menu or click the New model icon in the Standard toolbar to open the New model dialog box.
2.
At the center of the dialog box, Tekla Structures suggests the name "New Model" for the model. The full path of the model folder is shown in the first field.
3.
Replace the name "New Model" by BasicModel1.
4.
Click the OK button (or Enter) to create the new model.
The menus and icons become activated and the model name appears in the title bar of the Tekla Structures window. Every model must have a unique name. Tekla Structures does not allow duplicate model names. Do not use special marks ( / \ ; : | ) in model names.
You can only have one model open at a time. If you already have a model open, Tekla Structures prompts you to save that model.
Tekla Structures automatically created a grid and a view according to the saved standard view properties. The default 3D view and grid are shown below.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1
7
Cyan dash-and-dot lines show the projections of the grids which are visible on the view plane. Tekla Structures indicates the work area of a view using green, dashed lines. For more information, see: Help: Modeling > Getting started > Basics. Save the model
To save the model: 5.
Select File > Save from the pull-down menu or click the Save icon in the Standard toolbar.
Remember to save your model every now and then, and always when opening another model or exiting Tekla Structures.
Tekla Structures includes also an auto save feature that backs up and saves your work automatically at set intervals. These are set in the Autosave properties dialog box obtained from the Setup > Autosave… pull-down menu. For more information on saving and auto saving, see: Help: Modeling > Getting started > Basics > Saving a model and exiting Tekla Structures Most commands of Tekla Structures are found both in menus (main or pop-up) and in toolbars (icons). In this training manual we will mainly use the pop-up menu to activate commands. Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1
8
There are several ways to execute commands in Tekla Structures: x
Icons
x
Commands in main pull-down menu
x
Commands in pop-up menu
By default all the commands are found in pull-down menu, and most of them in the icons. A pop-up menu appears when you click the right mouse button (right-click). If you have an object selected, the commands on the pop-up menu relate to that object.
For more information on Tekla Structures screen layout and toolbars, see: Help: Modeling > Introduction > Screen layout Help: Modeling > Introduction > Toolbars
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1
9
1.3 Create Grids
To create the appropriate grid for BasicModel1 as shown above, you can delete the existing grid and create a new one from the Points > Grid… pull-down menu. Alternatively you can modify the existing grid. Modify the existing grid
To modify the existing grid: 1.
Double-click on the gridline.
2.
Complete the appearing Grid dialog box as shown below by filling in the X, Y and Z coordinates and the labels for the gridlines.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1
10
3.
Click Modify to apply the new grid values.
4.
Enter the grid file name, GRID1, and click the Save as button to save the grid values for later use. The settings are saved in the file GRID1.grd, which is stored in the attributes subfolder of your model folder.
For more information on grids and dialog box buttons, see: Help: Modeling > Introduction > Inputting information > Common buttons The number of decimals used in the Grid dialog box (as well as in other modeling dialog boxes) can be controlled from the Units and decimals... dialog box obtained from the Setup pull-down menu.
When the grid was modified, the work area of the view, shown with the green dashed line, was not updated. Fit work area
To fit the work area according to the modified grid: 1.
Click the view to activate it.
2.
Right-click and select Fit work area from the pop-up menu.
The view should now look as shown below:
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1
11
1.4 Create Plane Views along Gridlines We will now create Elevation and Plan views along the gridlines created in the previous section. A view is a representation of a model from a specific location. Each view is displayed in its own window inside the Tekla Structures window. Each view has a view plane on which the grids are visible and points are represented as yellow crosses. Points outside the view plane appear as red dots. For more information, see: Help: Modeling > Getting started > Views. Create grid views
To create views along gridlines, 1.
Select one gridline.
2.
Right-click and select Create view > Grid views from the pop-up menu to open the Creation of views along grid lines dialog box.
3.
Change the View properties as shown above and click the Show… button of the XY view plane to open the View properties dialog box.
4.
Change the View depth values as shown below and click OK to close the dialog box.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1
12
5.
Select the number of views as All and click Create in the Creation of views along grid lines dialog box.
The Views dialog box appears presenting all the created views. All invisible named views are listed on the left, and all visible views on the right.
For more information on view properties, see: Help: Modeling > Getting started > Views > View properties Display or hide views
To display or hide views: 1.
Click the Open named view list icon to open the Views dialog box (which is now already open).
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1
13
2.
Select the view(s) you want to display or hide.
3.
Use the arrows to move view(s) from left to right (visible) or vice versa (invisible).
Do not keep too many views open at the same time. Nine is the maximum number of open views. You can open or close named views by clicking the Open named view list icon. Delete unnecessary views from the view list. To switch between views, press Ctrl+Tab.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1
14
Rotate the model
Change between 3D / Plane
You can rotate the model in a 3D view with rendered view type. 1.
Press the key v.
2.
In the view, pick a center of rotation.
3.
Hold down the Ctrl key, and click and drag with the middle mouse button.
With the shortcut Ctrl+P you can change the view angle between 3D and Plane, which is very useful.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1
15
1.5 Create Foundations We will now create foundations for the BasicModel1.
Column footing 1800*1800 footing
To create footings for columns: 1.
Double-click on the Create pad footing icon. This will open Pad footing properties dialog box.
2.
Complete the Pad footing properties dialog box as shown below and click Apply.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1
16
3.
In the 3d view, pick the grid intersection A-1 to create the footing.
4.
Create the rest of the 1800*1800 footings at other intersections of gridline A by picking each position.
Help: Modeling > Parts > Part location > Position on work plane Help: Modeling > Parts > Part location > Position depth Help: Modeling > Parts > Part properties > Profile You can undo (and redo) previous commands one by one since the last save by clicking the icons or typing Ctrl + Z (Undo) and Ctrl + Y (Redo).
2700*2700 footing
While still in the command, 5.
Complete the Pad footing properties dialog box for a 2700*2700 footing as shown below and Apply this. The footings on gridline B need offsetting from the gridline because there will be additional columns modeled afterwards. This offset will be accomplished by adjusting the Vertical Position value in the Pad footing properties dialog box.
6.
Create the footings at intersections of the gridline B.
7.
Right click and select Interrupt to end the command.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1
17
The commands will stay active until you interrupt them. To end commands, right-click and select Interrupt from the pop-up menu, or press the Esc key. To restart the last command used, press Enter.
Foundations for silos – parametric profiles We will create two identical circular foundations for the silos. At first, one foundation will be created at the coordinate 4500,4500,0 and then the other foundation will be created as a copy of the first one. Tekla Structures contains standard (library), parametric, and user-defined profiles. For the foundation, we will use parametric profiles. Help: Modeling > Parts > Part properties > Profile Help: Modeling > Settings and tools > Appendix A: Parametric Profiles
Create footing
1.
Double-click on the Create pad footing icon.
2.
Complete the Pad footing properties dialog box as shown below and click Apply. You can select the profile for a part from the Select profile dialog box that opens next to the Profile field in the part properties dialog box. You can as well enter a profile name in the Profile field in the part properties dialog box.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1
18
3.
Type 4500,4500 to define the position for the footing (typing the numbers automatically displays the Enter a numeric location dialog box).
4.
Press Enter (or click OK) and the foundation is created.
Help: Modeling > Settings and tools > Tools > Snapping Copy the footing
1.
Click the footing once to select it.
2.
Right click and select Copy special > Translate from the pop-up menu..
3.
Click copy.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1
19
Now the footings should look as shown below:
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1
20
1.6 Create Columns We will first create two of the columns and then use the Copy command to create the other columns. You can create your columns and beams either in steel or concrete! Follow the left side of the instruction for steel and the right side for concrete.
Create steel/concrete columns
To create the first two columns.
Create steel columns
Create concrete columns
1. Double-click on the Create column icon.
1. Double-click on the Create concrete column icon.
2. Complete the Column properties dialog box as shown below.
2. Complete the Concrete column properties dialog box as shown below.
3. Complete the dialog's Position tab as shown below, and then click Apply.
3. Complete the dialog's Position tab as shown below, and then click Apply.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1
21
Copy columns
4.
Pick the intersection of gridlines A-1 to create one column, and then pick grid B-1 to create the second column.
1.
Select the columns that you just created by dragging a window across them.
2.
Right click and select Copy special> Translate… from the pop-up menu. Complete the dialog box as shown below and click Copy.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1
22
Now all the columns appear in the model.
When you want to model identical structures, you can alternatively create one footing (and its reinforcement), the steel column on top of it and the base plate connection between the footing and the column, and copy this structural entity to all other positions of similar structures. You can select multiple parts in the model by holding down the Ctrl-key when selecting objects in the model.
Help: Modeling > Introduction > Selecting model objects > How to select objects
Silos We will now model the steel silos by using solid parametric profiles. A more precise alternative would be to create the silo as a circular hollow section with a contour plate welded on top of it. Create silos
1.
To create the silos, double-click on the Create column icon.
2.
Complete the Column properties dialog box as shown below, and then click Apply.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1
23
3.
Pick the top point of the first silo footing and then the other.
Now the silos appear in the model.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1
24
The visibility of objects in views depends on the work area, view depth, view setup, and view filter. You can also temporarily hide parts in a view by using the Hide tool (on the pop-up menu). In the pictures hereafter all the model objects created may not always be visible. Help: Modeling > Getting started > Views > Displaying and hiding objects in views
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1
25
1.7 Create Beams Level 3850 beams We will first create the beams at the +3850 level and then copy them (using the select filter) to the two upper levels. Again, you can create the beams either in steel or in concrete. Create steel/concrete beams
1.
Open the PLAN +3850 view.
Create steel beams
Create concrete beams
2. Double-click on the Create beam icon.
2. Double-click on the Create concrete beam icon.
3. Complete the Beam properties dialog box as shown and Apply.
3. Complete the Concrete beam properties dialog box as shown.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1
26
4. Complete the dialog's Position tab as shown below, and Apply.
5. In the PLAN +3850 view pick the intersection of gridlines A-4 and then B-4.
5. In the PLAN +3850 view pick the intersection of gridlines A-4 and then B-4.
6. Continue at gridlines 5, 6, and 7.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1
27
When inputting horizontal members always pick from left to right or from bottom to top for consistency purposes.
Copy beams to upper levels Filter beams
1.
Choose the select filter option beam_filter from the drop down list. Help: Modeling > Settings and tools > Filter > Select filter
Copy beams
2.
By dragging the mouse, select an area in the model as shown below.
1.
Open the Grid 7 view, right-click and select Copy from the pop-up menu.
2.
Pick the gridline intersection B-3850 and then B-7350.
3.
Copy beams to level +13400 by repeating steps 1-2.
4.
Change the select filter option back to standard to enable also the selection of other objects than beams.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1
28
Level 13400 beams Next we will create beams at the view +13400 level. Create grid beams
By using the same beam properties that we applied earlier, create the missing beams at the gridline intersections shown in the figure below.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1
29
Create the rest of the beams
Next we will create beams in locations where no gridlines intersect. The snapping tools help you pick points to position objects precisely without having to know the coordinates or layout additional lines or points. Help: Modeling > Settings and tools > Tools > Snapping
Create beam A
1.
Double-click one of the existing beams in the model and press Apply.
2.
Start the beam command.
2. Start the concrete beam command.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1
30
Create beam B
3.
Make sure only the Snap to reference lines / points icon of the two main snap switches on the right is pressed down.
4.
Make sure the Snap to mid points and Snap to end points icons are pressed down.
5.
Pick a midpoint of the beam between A2 and A-3 and then the midpoint of the beam between B-2 and B-3.
5. Pick a midpoint of the beam between A-2 and A-3 and then the midpoint of the beam between B-2 and B-3.
We will pick the start position of beam B by using the gridline intersection A-1 as a temporary reference point and tracking along gridline 1 in the direction of intersection B-1 for 9000 mm. We will then pick the second position of beam B using the temporary snap switch Perpendicular.
Pick the first position of beam B
1.
Start the beam command.
2.
Hold down the Ctrl key and pick gridline intersection A-1 as the origin to show the “From” location coordinates.
3.
Then use the cursor to snap (do not pick!!) in the correct direction (e.g. to gridline intersection B-1).
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
1.
Start the concrete beam command.
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1
31
Pick second position of beam B
4.
Type 9000 for the numeric location. (The Enter a numeric location dialog box will open automatically.)
5.
Press OK or Enter and the cursor snaps to the correct position. (=9000 mm from A-1 in the direction of B-1).
6.
Right click and select Perpendicular.
7.
Pick the second position on beam A (see below).
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
7. Pick the second position on beam A (see below).
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1
32
Create beam C
Create beam D
While still in the beam command, 8.
Right click and select Intersection for snap override.
9.
Pick the intersection of beam B and gridline 2 and then the intersection of gridlines B-2.
9. Pick the intersection of beam B and gridline 2 and then the intersection of gridlines B-2.
We will first create one of the beams that frame around the silo and then by using the Copy > Rotate command create the other three.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1
33
Help: Modeling > Settings and tools > Settings and tools reference > Edit>Copy >Rotate…
Copy rotate the beam
1.
Hold down the Ctrl key and pick gridline intersection A-1 to show the “From” location coordinates, use the cursor to snap (do not pick!!) in the correct direction. (E.g. grid intersection B-1).
2.
Type 4000 for the numeric location and press Enter, the cursor snaps to the correct position.
3.
Type the letter O on the keyboard to snap to positions in orthogonal directions on the work plane (0, 45, 90, 135, and 180 degrees).
4.
Let the cursor snap to the midpoint as shown below and pick.
5.
Type the letter O to turn the ortho off.
1.
Select the beam that you just created.
2.
Right click and select Copy special > Rotate… from the pop-up menu.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1
34
Copy translate the beam to the other silo
3.
Pick the center point of the silo as the point to define the rotation (select a view in which the silos are visible and pick near the circumference to snap to the center point). The origin X0 and Y0 values will appear in the dialog box.
4.
Complete the other fields in the dialog.
5.
Click Copy.
We will now copy the beams to the other silo. 1.
Select the beams shown highlighted in the picture below (press the Ctrl key to add parts to the selection).
2.
Copy special > translate… them 9000 mm in the x direction.
Bracing Working in the Grid A elevation view, we will input the vertical steel bracing members using the Create beam tool.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1
35
Create braces a and b
1.
Double-click on the Create beam icon.
2.
Complete the Beam properties dialog box as shown below and Apply.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1
36
3.
In the 3d view create brace a by first picking the gridline intersection A-2 and then the midpoint of column A-3.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1
37
4.
Use handle to move brace end
Create brace b by picking the top position of column A-2 and then midpoint of column A-3.
We can see from the drawing above that the lower end of the brace needs 200 mm offsetting from the grid level. Now we will use handles to move the part end. Help: Modeling > Parts > Part location 1.
Select brace a to display the handles.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1
38
Copy mirror braces a and b
2.
Select the yellow handle (Tekla Structures then highlights the handle).
3.
Right click and select Move special > Translate… to move the handle 200 mm upwards.
4.
Click Move.
5.
Repeat the procedure to move brace b’s top handle 1000 mm downwards.
1.
Select braces a and b.
2.
Right click and select Copy special > Mirror…
3.
In the 3d view, pick grid A-3 then grid B-3 to define the mirror line.
4.
Click Copy.
Help: Modeling > Settings and tools > Settings and tools reference > Edit>Copy >Mirror… Now we have modeled all the steel and concrete members in Model1. The model should look like in the picture below.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1
39
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1
40
1.8 Create Slabs
Concrete hollow-core slabs We will now create concrete hollow-core slabs. Instead of positioning the slabs to the gridline intersection we will model the slabs to the face of the steel columns. Create hollowcore slabs
In the PLAN +13400 view: 1.
Double-click on the Create concrete beam icon.
2.
Complete the Concrete beam properties dialog box as shown and Apply.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1
41
If you have modeled steel columns and beams:
If you have modeled concrete columns and beams:
3. Pick the intersection of the column flange outer face and gridline 4 and then the intersection of the column flange outer face and gridline 5 (make sure that Snap to geometry lines/points is active).
3. Pick the intersection of the column outer border and gridline 4 and then the intersection of the column outer border and gridline 5 (make sure that Snap to geometry lines/points is active).
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1
42
Copy the slabs in y direction
Copy the slabs in x direction
1.
Select the slab that you just created.
2.
Right click and select Copy special > Translate… from the pop-up menu.
3.
Type 1200 in the dY field of the Copy – translate dialog box and 10 as the number of copies.
1.
Drag an area select, selecting all the concrete slabs.
2.
Right click and select Copy > Translate… from the pop-up menu.
3.
Type 6000 in the dX field of the Copy - translate dialog box.
4.
Click Copy.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1
43
Copy hollow-core slabs to levels 7350 and 3850 Copy the slabs
1.
Hold down the Ctrl key and select all the hollow-core slabs by dragging 3 areas through the slabs.
2.
Still holding down the Ctrl key, pick the two slabs shown in the picture below to unselect them.
3.
Right click and select Copy special > Translate… from the pop-up menu.
4.
Enter -6050 in the dZ field of the Copy special > Translate dialog box, click Copy.
5.
Enter -9550 in the dZ field of the Copy special > Translate dialog box, click Copy.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1
44
Concrete slab
Start the slab command
1.
Double-click on the Create concrete slab icon.
2.
Complete the Concrete slab properties dialog box as shown and Apply.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1
45
Pick positions for the slab
3.
In the PLAN +13400 view pick point A (intersection of column flange outer face and gridline 1, shown in the drawing above).
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1
46
4.
Let the cursor snap to the position just picked (do not pick!) and press y to lock the y coordinate.
5.
Let the cursor now snap to the end point of the beam near point B and pick.
6.
Press y to release the coordinate lock.
7.
Pick point C.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1
47
Copy concrete slab
8.
Pick point D.
9.
Click the middle mouse button to create the slab.
1.
Select the slab that you just created.
2.
Copy – translate the slab 9000 mm in x direction.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1
48
Create in-situ slabs Before we add reinforcements to concrete members we need to create additional 600 mm wide in-situ slabs beside the hollow-core slab area in first and second floors. For this, zoom in to first floor in gridlines A and 5 – 6. 1.
Double-click on the Create concrete slab icon.
2.
Set the profile height to 175 mm.
3.
Press OK to close the dialog.
4.
Start picking the polygon shape at the middle of the hollow-core slab in gridline 5. Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1
49
5.
Write: R then add 0, 600, to the Enter a numeric location dialog and press OK.
6.
Write: R then add 6050, 0, to the Enter a numeric location dialog and press OK.
7.
Write: R then add 0, -600, to the Enter a numeric location dialog and press OK.
8.
Close the polygon with middle button.
Now select the slab and copy it 3500.00 mm in z-direction using Copy special > Translate… right button command. Now the Model1 framework is finished.
Links to additional information Help: Modeling > Introduction > General information > Single user mode vs multiuser mode Help: Modeling > Introduction > General information > Languages and environments
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1
50
System Components for Precast Concrete
Tekla Structures 12.0 Basic Training September 19, 2006 Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
SYSTEM COMPONENTS FOR PRECAST CONCRETE System Components for Precast Concrete
ii
Contents
Contents ................................................................................................................................ 1
2
System Components for Precast Concrete .............................................................. 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4
About System Connections .......................................................................................................2 Create System Connections ......................................................................................................4 Create Rebars Using System Components .............................................................................15 Modify All the Corbel Connections...........................................................................................32
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
SYSTEM COMPONENTS FOR PRECAST CONCRETE System Components for Precast Concrete
i
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
SYSTEM COMPONENTS FOR PRECAST CONCRETE System Components for Precast Concrete
ii
2
System Components for Precast Concrete
In this lesson
This lesson introduces the basics of creating system components in Tekla Structures. You will learn how to:
2.1
x
Create connection and reinforcement components
x
Work with component properties
x
Save the properties for later use.
About System Components You can model connections, reinforcements, etc, quickly with the Tekla Structures system components. The greatest benefits of using system components are: x
The connection properties can be saved with a particular name so that they can be used later. These properties can then be used for all projects.
x
When you modify a main object's profile in the model, all of the connections to the object are automatically modified at the same time.
x
If you select options such as move or copy, all components are automatically included.
x
With AutoDefaults you can create rules defining when to use different component properties.
All available system components are located in the component catalog, which can be opened using Ctrl+F or by clicking the binocular icon on the component toolbar.
When applying a connection that you are unfamiliar with, accept the default properties and create the connection. Then look to see what needs to be modified. This is usually quicker than trying to set the values for the connection before seeing what the connection actually creates. Help: Detailing > Getting started > Using components > Creating components Help: Detailing > Getting started > Basics > Component concepts Help: Detailing > Getting started > Basics > Picking order Help: Detailing > Getting started > Basics > Up direction
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete
2
Check clashing of structures In lesson 1 we created a model of a small industrial structure. To complete the model we will need to connect the parts. Before creating the connections usually all of the members in the model collide with other members. By using the Clash check command we can check which parts in the model collide. We will run a clash check now and then again after the connections components have been applied. Help: Modeling > Settings and Tools > Querying objects > Clash check Check clashing
1.
Select all of the parts of the model by dragging an area select around the whole model.
2.
Right-click and select Clash check.
Tekla Structures highlights the colliding parts in yellow and displays the clash check log in the List dialog box. You can see that all the parts in the model collide.
3.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
Select any clashing parts on the list and Tekla Structures highlights them in the model.
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete
3
2.2 Create System Components Next we will create connection components to beam-to-beam and beam-to-column situations. The connections will automatically fit the concrete members.
Use of components: x
Click once on the component icon to activate the command.
x
Double-click on the component icon to activate the command and open the component dialog.
Note: if you click again on an already active command, the command will be deactivated.
Fitting concrete members The beams between gridlines 1 and 4 at elevation +13400 will be in-situ concrete beams. In lesson 3 we will create a cast unit out of the beams, but first we will need to fit the beams and columns. We will use the battering component.
Set the connection parameters
1.
Open the component catalog by clicking on the binocular icon or by typing Ctrl+F.
2.
To see pictures of the connection, check that the Thumbnails icon is active, see below.
3.
Type "battering" into the upper field and click on the Search button.
1.
Double-click on the Battering connection (13) icon to activate the command and open the dialog.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete
4
Extend beams
2.
Change the distance to –380 as shown on the dialog below.
3.
Click Apply to take the component setting in to use (the dialog is left open).
4.
Pick the column and then a beam at grid intersection A-1 to extend the beam.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete
5
Change the connection parameters
Shorten all the other beams
5.
Repeat for grid intersections A-4, B-1, B-2, B-3 and B-4.
6.
Leave the command running.
1.
Select standard from the drop-down menu at the top of the dialog and click Load (the clearance value field is cleared).
2.
Click OK to apply the settings and close the dialog.
3.
Pick the extended beam at the grid intersection A-1 and then the other beam. The secondary beam is fit according to the primary beam.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete
6
4.
Repeat the procedure for all those beam-to-beam situations in the model where beams clash with each other.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete
7
Shorten the columns
Next cut the column on grid A-4 in the same way: 1.
Pick beam.
2.
Pick column.
3.
Repeat to all the columns on gridlines 1 to 4. (Note! If you are working on level +13400 and the view depth is 500, you may not see the cut columns, but they are visible in other views.)
4.
Interrupt the command.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete
8
Create corbel connection We will use the Corbel connection (14) to create corbels to columns on gridlines 4 to 7 at elevations +3850 and +7350. The corbel is automatically added to the same cast unit as the column. This connection will cut the beam and add a bearing pad and a reinforcing bar according to the connection settings. For more information on the corbel connection click the Help… icon on the connection dialog.
Set the connection parameters
Create the connection
1.
Click Ctrl+F and find Corbel connection (14).
2.
Double-click on the connection icon to open the connection dialog.
3.
Change the component settings according to the dialog below.
4.
Accept the settings by clicking OK.
5.
At grid A-4, elevation +3850, pick the column and then the beam.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete
9
6.
Interrupt the command.
Check connection To make it easier to check the connection you created, you can create views from different sides of a selected connection. In the view the work area is closely fitted around the connection. Create connection basic views Select connection
1.
Select the component.
2.
Right mouse click.
3.
Select Create view > Component basic views.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete
10
4.
Check dimensions
Keep the connection front view open and close the other connection basic views.
We will now check that the corbel dimensions are as we defined on the connection dialog. Help: Modeling > Settings and Tools > Querying objects > Measure
1.
Click Create x measure.
2.
Pick two points at the edges of the corbel.
3.
Pick a third point to define the dimension line location.
4.
Check also the y dimensions.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete
11
Check cast unit
We will now check the cast unit. Help: Modeling > Parts > Cast units and assemblies 1.
Press down ALT and then pick column. The corbel will also be highlighted.
The corbel and the other connection objects are automatically added to the column cast unit.
Create the rest of the corbel connections
1.
Reactivate the Corbel connection (14) command.
2.
Repeat the creation procedure to all the other column-beam situations on gridlines 4 to 7 at elevations +3850 and +7350.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete
12
Create dowel connection Next we will create dowel connections in the beam-to-column situations on gridlines 5 to 7 at elevation +13400. We will use the Seating with dowel (75) connection. This connection automatically fits the column according to the beam. It also creates the necessary cuts to the beam, adds a bearing pad and the dowel according to the connection settings. For more information on the Dowel connection click on the Help… icon on the connection dialog.
Create the connection
1.
Click Ctrl+F and find Dowel connection (75).
2.
Use the default settings (click the connection only once).
3.
Pick the column and the beam on grid B-7, elevation +13400.
5.
Repeat in all the beam-to-column situations on gridlines 5 to 7 at elevation +13400.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete
13
Create cuts to hollow-core slab corners We will next fit the hollow-core slab corners to the columns. For this we'll use the grating penetration component.
Set the connection parameters
Create the connection
1.
Find Grating penetration component (92) in the component catalog.
2.
Double-click on the icon to open the properties dialog.
3.
Set the Penetration type to Rectangular and the clearance around the column to 20 mm.
4.
Close the dialog with OK.
5.
At grid A-4, elevation +3850, pick the hollow-core slab.
6.
Pick the column.
7.
Repeat steps 5 and 6 for all other hollow-core slab corners that collide with columns.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete
14
2.3 Create Rebars Using System Components Once you have created and detailed a model of concrete parts, you may need to reinforce the parts. Reinforcing macros create the entire reinforcement of a part in one go. The reinforcement is created according to the component attributes. Reinforcement created using a component is updated automatically if the dimensions of the reinforced concrete part change. See more about reinforcements in Tekla Structures help: Detailing > Reinforcement > Getting started with reinforcement and in help: Detailing > Reinforcement > Basic reinforcement properties.
Reinforcing pad footings We will first put reinforcements into the 1800*1800 pad footings, which are 650 mm high. For this we use the Pad footing reinforcing macro. For more information click the Help… icon in the component dialog. Define component parameters
1.
Find the Pad footing (77) component in the component catalog.
2.
Double-click on the component to define the properties to be used.
3.
Check the cover thicknesses on the Picture tab page:
4.
Next define primary bars as described below. Select the grade and size from the Select reinforcing bar dialog, which opens when you push the button in the size field. Exit the dialog with OK.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete
15
Create reinforcements
5.
Use the same settings for the secondary bars and put 12 mm reinforcement in 200 mm intervals.
6.
Then you need to set the lacer bars as described below.
7.
Save the values in the Save as field with the name 1800*1800-650.
8.
Close the dialog with OK.
9.
Now pick the Pad footing at A-1 sized 1800*1800*650. The macro generates the reinforcement inside the pad footing.
10. Repeat to all the other 1800*1800*650 sized pad footings.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete
16
You can create reinforcements components to multiple parts by using area select, e.g. activate component, area select all pad footings on grid line A. Note, if you already have reinforcement created e.g. A&1 and you area select it together with the others, second set of reinforcements will be created.
For pad footings on gridline B we will use the Pilecap reinforcement component, which creates reinforcement also to the top of the footing. For more information click the help in the component dialog. Define component parameters
1.
Find the Pilecap reinforcement (76) component in the component catalog.
2.
Double-click on the reinforcing component to define the properties to be used.
3.
Check the cover thicknesses on the Picture tab page:
4.
Next define top primary and secondary bars as described below. Select the grade and the size in the Select reinforcing bar dialog, which opens when you click on the button […] in the size field. Exit the dialog with OK. With these settings, top bars will be created only under columns 150% of the column size.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete
17
Create reinforcements
5.
Now define bottom bars for primary and secondary directions using 16 mm bars in 150 mm spacing, bend length on both sides is 700 mm. The bottom bars don't need to suit the piles, so you can use the default in that field and leave the % fields empty.
6.
Then set 10 mm diameter lacer bars at 200 mm intervals starting at 100 and ending at 700 mm.
7.
Save the values in the Save as field with the name 2700*2700-850.
8.
Close the dialog with OK.
9.
Now pick first the Pad footing sized 2700*2700*850 at B-1, then the column on top of the footing. End with clicking the middle mouse button. The macro generates the reinforcement inside the pad footing and concentrates top bars under the column.
10. Repeat step 9 for all pad footings on gridline B.
Reinforcing columns
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete
18
We will now create reinforcements into columns using the Rectangular column reinforcement component. See more information by clicking the Help… icon in the component dialog. Define component parameters to be used on gridlines 5 to 7
1.
Find Rectangular column reinforcement (83) in the component catalog.
2.
Double-click on the component to define the properties to be used.
3.
Turn on side bars, and define cover thickness and rebar diameters as described below:
4.
Set the top bars so that they hold the dowel as shown below:
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete
19
Create reinforcements
5.
And the bottom bars as shown below:
6.
Press OK to close the dialog.
7.
Pick the column on grid intersection A-7, and the component generates reinforcements inside the column.
8.
Pick, one by one, all the columns on gridlines A and B between gridlines 5 and 7. . (Note: you can also use area select as explained on page 17)
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete
20
We will now change the component settings to be used on the columns between gridlines 1 and 4.
Define component parameters to be used on gridlines 1 to 4
Create reinforcements
1.
Double-click on the component in the component catalog again.
2.
Change the main rebars to come out from the top of the column (into the in-situ beams) as shown below.
3.
Turn off the top rebars.
4.
Click OK to lock the settings and close the dialog.
5.
Pick the column at A-1, and the component creates reinforcements as defined.
6.
Pick, one by one, all the columns on gridlines A and B between gridlines 1 and 4. (Note: you can also use area select as explained on page 17)
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete
21
We will next reinforce the column corbels using the Corbel reinforcement (81) component. See more information by clicking the Help… icon in the component dialog.
Create reinforcements
1.
Find the Corbel reinforcement (81) in the catalog.
2.
Click the component icon once to active the command.
3.
Pick first the column, then the corbel and end the selection with the middle mouse button. The component generates reinforcements inside the corbel and the column.
4.
Create corbel reinforcement for all the corbels.
To see connections, such as a corbel connection, in shaded wire frame, use the shortcut Shift+2.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete
22
You can create the corbel reinforcement in a two-sided situation by picking first the column, then both the corbels and then end the selection with the middle mouse button.
Two components don't interact together - depending on the settings, it is possible that reinforcements collide. Check collisions with clash check option. Remember to use object in components select switch, see page 27.
Reinforcing beams We will next create reinforcements into beams using two reinforcing components. See more information by clicking the Help… icon in the component dialog.
We will first create main bars and stirrups.
Create reinforcements
1.
Find Beam reinforcement (63) in the catalog.
2.
We are going to use the default settings. Click on the reinforcing component once to activate the command.
3.
Pick the beam at gridline 7 at elevation +3850. The component generates reinforcements inside the beam and cuts the bottom bars at the corbels.
4.
Pick, one by one, all the precast concrete beams between gridlines 4 and 7. (Note: you can also use area select as explained on page 16)
We will continue reinforcing the beams by inserting additional rebars at the beam ends. This we will do with the Beam end reinforcement (79) component. See more information by clicking the Help… icon in the component dialog. 1.
Find the Beam end reinforcement (79).
2.
We are going to use the default settings. Click on the reinforcing component once to activate the command.
3.
Pick a position at the end of a beam. (Note: this point can be any corner at the end of the beam)
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete
23
Create reinforcement
4.
Pick the beam, and the component generates reinforcements inside the beam.
5.
Repeat the picking for each end of all precast concrete beams between gridlines 4 and 7 at elevations +3850 and +7350.
Next we will create the beam end reinforcement for a beam at elevation +13400. Create reinforcement
1.
Using the same settings, create the beam end reinforcement at grid intersection A-7 at +13400.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete
24
As shown above, the reinforcements come through the cut at the top of the beam. So we need to change the parameters and modify the connection.
2.
Open view GRID 7 to see the situation better.
3.
Double-click on the component to open the component dialog.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete
25
In the dialog, study the area marked with a red frame above. The problem rebars are defined as 5A. Change connection parameters
4.
Go to the Groups tab and change the distance between the rebars to 30.00 210.00 40.00 as shown below.
Modify the connection
5.
Click Modify.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete
26
The connection is modified and the rebars are arranged according to the new settings.
Create reinforcements
6.
Click Apply to use the new settings.
7.
Create the beam end reinforcements to all the other beams at elevation +13400.
When trying to select the component it is important to understand the Select component and Select objects in component icons in the Select toolbar:
When the Select component icon is active you can only select the component, not the objects created by the component. You can open the component dialog by double-clicking on any component object.
When the Select objects in components icon is active you can select objects inside the component: parts, bolts, reinforcements, etc. If you need to modify the component you need to double-click on the component symbol.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete
27
Reinforcing slabs We will next create reinforcement mesh into the slabs at elevations +3850 and +7350 using the Slab bars (18) reinforcing component. See more information by clicking the Help… icon in the component dialog.
Define component parameters
Create mesh
1.
Find Slab bars (18) in the catalog.
2.
Double-click on the component to define the properties to be used.
3.
Define the cover thickness to be used.
4.
Open the Bottom bars tab page and set the bar diameter to 10 mm, and spacing in both directions to 200 mm. Change also the bar generation type to mesh.
5.
Use the same settings for top bars.
6.
Close the dialog with OK.
7.
Pick the cast in-situ slab between gridlines 5 and 6 at level +3850. The macro generates reinforcements inside the slabs.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete
28
8.
Create reinforcements to the in-situ slab at level +7350.
Lifting hooks We will next create lifting anchors into beams and columns using the Lifting anchor (80) macro. The macro generates lifting anchors according to center of gravity. See more information by clicking the Help… icon in the component dialog.
Define component parameters
1.
Find Lifting anchor (80) in the component catalog.
2.
Double-click on the component to define the properties to be used.
3.
Select anchor shape and define anchor dimensions.
4.
Select anchor size and grade.
5.
Change also side and class.
6.
Click Apply to lock the settings.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete
29
Create lifting anchor
7.
Pick the column at grid intersection A-1. The macro generates lifting anchors inside the column.
8.
Pick, one by one, all the columns on gridline A. (Note: you can also use area select as explained on page 16)
The corbels are on the other side of the columns on gridline B so we need to modify the lifting anchors to appear on the other side of the column. Change component parameters
Create lifting anchor
1.
Change the side to Top.
2.
Click OK to lock the settings and close the dialog.
3.
Pick, one by one, all the columns on gridline B. (Note: you can also use area select as explained on page 16)
Still using the Lifting anchor (80) component, we are going to create lifting anchors to all the pre-cast concrete beams.
Change component parameters
1.
Double-click on the component again.
2.
Change the anchor shape and dimensions and apply.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete
30
Create lifting anchor
3.
Pick the beam on gridline 7 at elevation +3850. The macro generates a lifting anchor inside the beam.
4.
One by one, pick all the pre-cast concrete beams. (Note: you can also use area select as explained on page 16)
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete
31
2.4 Modify All the Corbel Connections Next we are going to modify the corbel connections. 1.
Double-click on the corbel connection on A-7 at elevation +3850 to open the connection dialog.
2.
Select and load the standard settings.
3.
Click Modify.
As you can see, the reinforcement inside the corbel and the beam will be modified according to the changed corbel size.
Modify all the corbel connections at once
We can easily modify only connections of the same type shown in the connection dialog by selecting Ignore other types in the connection dialog box. Help: Detailing > Getting started > Using components > Modifying components 1. Check that Ignore other types is selected in the connection dialog box.
2. Select all the connections in the model by using the Select connection select switch shown below and dragging a window around the whole model.
3. Click Modify.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete
32
System Components for Steel
Tekla Structures 12.0 Basic Training September 21, 2006 Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
Contents
2
Creating System Components for Steel ....................................................................3 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7
About System Components.......................................................................................................3 Column Base Plates ..................................................................................................................5 Beam to Beam Web ..................................................................................................................8 Beam to Column Web .............................................................................................................11 Beam to Column Flange..........................................................................................................16 Create AutoDefaults Rules ......................................................................................................18 Use AutoDefaults Rules ..........................................................................................................25
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Contents
i
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Contents
ii
2
In this lesson
Creating System Components for Steel
This lesson introduces the basics of creating system connections in Tekla Structures. You will learn how to: x
Create connections
x
Work with connection properties
x
Save the properties for later use
x
Work with AutoDefaults, i.e. create rules to apply pre-defined connection properties automatically
2.1 About System Components You can model connections quickly with the Tekla Structures system components. The greatest benefits of using system components are: x
The connection properties can be saved with a particular name so that they can be used later. These properties can then be used for all projects.
x
When you modify a main objects profile in the model all of the connections to the object are automatically modified at the same time.
x
If you select options such as edit, copy, or mirror, all connections are automatically included. The connections that are copied or mirrored are exactly the same as the originals. The same applies to plates and bolts.
x
With AutoDefaults you can create rules defining when to use different connection properties.
All available system components are located in the component catalog, which can be opened using Ctrl+F or by clicking the binocular icon on the component toolbar.
When applying a connection that you are unfamiliar with, accept the default properties and create the connection. Then look to see what needs to be modified. This is usually quicker than trying to set the values for the connection before seeing what the connection actually creates. Help: Detailing > Getting started > Using components > Creating components Help: Detailing > Getting started > Basics > Component concepts Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Creating System Components for Steel
3
Help: Detailing > Getting started > Basics > Picking order Help: Detailing > Getting started > Basics > Up direction
Check clashing of steel structures In Chapter 1 we created a model of a small industrial structure. To complete the model we will need to connect the parts. Before creating the connections usually all of the members in the model collide with other members. By using the Clash check command we can check which parts in the model collide. We will run a clash check now and then again after the connections have been applied. Help: Modeling > Settings and tools > Querying objects > Clash check Check clashing
1.
Select all of the parts of the model by dragging an area select around the whole model.
2.
Right-click and select Clash check.
Tekla Structures highlights the colliding parts in yellow and displays the clash check log in the List dialog box. You can see that all of the parts in the model collide.
Select any clashing parts from the list and Tekla Structures highlights them in the model.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Creating System Components for Steel
4
2.2 Column Base Plates The first system connections that we will add are the column base plate details. First we will create a base plate using the default values. We will then modify the properties of the base plate and finally create the rest of the base plates with the new properties. Create base plate to one column
1.
Open the component catalog by clicking on the binocular icon or by typing Ctrl+F.
2.
To see pictures of the connection, check that the Thumbnails icon is active, see below.
3.
Type "base plate" into the upper field and click on the Search button. In the Component catalog, double-click on the Base plate (1004) icon.
4.
The following dialog appears:
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Creating System Components for Steel
5
5.
Click OK to accept the default values.
6.
Pick any column.
7.
When prompted, pick the bottom endpoint of the column as the position and the base plate will be created.
8.
Use the shortcut Ctrl+2 to set the parts displayed in shaded wire frame.
You can see that the anchor bolts were created just as ordinary bolts.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Creating System Components for Steel
6
Add anchor rods to base plates
We will change the bolts in the base plate to anchor rods by modifying the connection properties. 1.
Double-click on the green connection symbol, and the Base plate dialog box will reopen.
2.
Select the Anchor rods tab page in the dialog box.
3.
Edit the values in the fields shown highlighted in the figure below.
4.
Click Modify and the bolts become anchor bars.
5.
Click OK to accept the properties for use later.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Creating System Components for Steel
7
Create base plates to rest of the columns
1.
Press the Enter key to start the base plate command again. To repeat the last command, do one of the following: x
Click Edit -> Repeat last command
Press Enter
2.
Create the rest of the base plates by picking each column and then the position for the base plate.
2.3 Beam to Beam Web Shear plates We will use the Shear plate simple (146) connection to make the beam to beam web connections. The shear plate will be welded to the primary beam web and bolted to the secondary beam web. We will use the connection both when the secondary beam is perpendicular to the main member or at a skewed angle to the main member. Create one shear plate connection
1.
Open the component dialog (Ctrl+F or binocular icon), find the Shear plate simple (146) connection, and double-click on its icon.
The following dialog appears:
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Creating System Components for Steel
8
2.
Pick the beam on gridline 1 as the main part of the connection.
3.
Pick the beam perpendicular to the main part to be the secondary part and the connection will be created.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Creating System Components for Steel
9
Check the connection To make it easier to check the connection you created you can create views from different sides of a selected connection. In the view the work area is closely fitted around the connection. Create connection basic views
Check bolt dimensions
To create component basic views: 1.
Select the connection symbol.
2.
Right-click and select Create view > Component basic views, and four basic views (front, top end and perspective) appear.
3.
Keep the Component front view open and close the other component basic views.
We will now check the bolt location distances and bolt edge distances between bolts and the shear plate. Help: Modeling > Settings and tools > Querying objects > Measure 1.
Click Tools > Measure > Bolt measure.
2.
Pick the bolt group.
3.
Pick the shear plate and the temporary dimensions are shown in the view.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Creating System Components for Steel
10
Now we will accept the created connection with the default properties. Create the rest of the shear plates
With the connection’s applied properties, create shear plate connections to all the other beam to beam conditions.
2.4 Beam to Column Web We will use the End plate (144) connection to make the beam to column web connections. For the double sided beam to column web connections we will use the Two sided end plate (142) connection. That connection uses only one bolt group to go through all three parts. We will then make the wall brace to column connections with Tube gusset (20). The connection uses a gusset plate to connect the beam to the column. Connection plates welded to the end of the braces will be bolted to the gusset plate.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Creating System Components for Steel
11
End plate We will now use the End plate (144) connection to make all beam to column web connections using the default connection properties. We will modify the properties later with AutoDefaults. Create end plates
1.
In the component catalog, find the End plate (144) connection.
2.
Make an end plate connection at every beam to column web condition where there is only one secondary beam coming to the column web. The column is the main part in the connection, so when prompted, pick the column as the main part.
Two-sided end plate Create the two sided end plate connection to all double sided beam to column web conditions to connect beams to both sides of the column web: Create two-sided end plates
1.
Find the Two sided end plate (142) connection.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Creating System Components for Steel
12
2.
When prompted, pick the column as the main part.
3.
Pick each beam as a secondary part.
4.
Click the middle mouse button to complete the connection. When there are multiple secondaries you need to click the middle mouse button to complete the selection. Help: Detailing > Getting started > Basics > Picking order
Wall bracing – tube gusset We will connect all the wall braces to columns using Tube gusset (20) connections and after that modify their properties all at once. Create tube gusset to intersection of braces
1.
Find the Tube gusset (20) connection.
2.
Pick the column on grid intersection A-3 as the main part.
3.
Pick the four braces, one by one, as secondaries.
4.
Click the middle mouse button to create the connection.
Now we can see that the connection created has only one gusset plate which goes through the column. We could also have created a separate gusset plate at each side of the column by creating two separate connections.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Creating System Components for Steel
13
Create the rest of the tube gussets
While still in the command, create the connections to the other ends of the braces by doing the following: 1.
Pick the column.
2.
Pick the brace.
3.
Click the middle mouse button to create the connection.
Modify the connection
Edit the number of bolt rows
1.
On the Bracebolts1, Bracebolts2 and Bracebolts3 tab pages, edit the number of horizontal and vertical bolt rows as shown in the figures below.
2.
Click Modify and then Apply.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Creating System Components for Steel
14
The Bracebolts1 tab affects the first picked brace, Bracebolts2 tab the second pick and Bracebolts3 picks 3-9.
Check the changes
Check that the number of bolt rows was changed and that the clearance is correct. To check the clearance: 1.
Click the Create X measure icon.
2.
Pick the starting and end points as shown:
3.
Pick a point to locate the dimension.
4.
Repeat for the other dimensions you want to check.
Now we will also modify the other tube gusset connections with the new properties we applied. Modify all the tube gusset connections at once
We can easily modify only connections of the same type shown in the connection dialog by selecting Ignore other types in the connection dialog box. 1.
Check that Ignore other types is selected in the connection dialog box. Help: Modifying connections Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Creating System Components for Steel
15
2.
Select all the connections in the model by using the Select connections select switch shown below and dragging a window around the whole model.
3.
Click Modify.
We will now save the edited properties for later use. By saving the properties with a descriptive name you can easily use them later. You can also get AutoDefaults to automatically use the saved properties in desired cases by setting up AutoDefaults rules.
Save the properties
4.
Type Wall bracings in the Save as field in the dialog box.
5.
Click the Save as button.
2.5 Beam to Column Flange We will now create End plate (144) connections to all the beam to column flange conditions by using the default properties. Then we will edit one of the connection’s properties. Instead of modifying the rest of the connections with the new properties, in the next section, we will create AutoDefaults rules to define when certain properties will be used.
End plate Create end plates
1.
Find the End plate (144) connection.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Creating System Components for Steel
16
2.
Create connections at all the beam to column flange framing conditions.
Change the number of bolt rows and save the properties We will now change the number of bolt rows to eight when the secondary beam is IPE600. We will then save the new properties with a specific name so that we will be able to use them in AutoDefaults. We will also save properties with seven bolt rows for later use with IPE500 beams. 8 bolt rows to IPE600
1.
Double-click one of the connections we just created to open the connection dialog box.
2.
On the Bolts tab input 8 as the number of bolt rows.
3.
Click Modify.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Creating System Components for Steel
17
7 bolt rows to IPE500
4.
Type 8_bolt_rows in the Save as field in the dialog box and click Save as.
5.
On the Bolts page input 7 as the number of bolt rows.
6.
Use Save as to save the properties as 7_bolt_rows.
2.6 Create AutoDefaults Rules With AutoDefaults you can create rules defining when to use different pre-defined connection properties. When the connections need to be modified (for example changing the beam size), Tekla Structures automatically redefines the connection properties using AutoDefaults rules defined by you.
New rule group: Industrial building rules We will now create a new AutoDefaults rule group named Industrial building rules. This rule group could include all the rules needed to define when to use certain pre-defined connection properties for the entire project. Help: System > AutoConnection > AutoDefaults setup > AutoDefaults setup We will first select connection parameters to be always used for Tube gusset (20) connection. We will then define two simple rules for the End plate (144) connection. 1.
When the secondary is an IPE500, the end plate connection will have 7 bolt rows.
2.
When secondary is an IPE600, the end plate connection will have 8 bolt rows.
When the secondary is neither of the above (IPE500 or IPE600) the default rule will be met and the standard properties will be used.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Creating System Components for Steel
18
Create new rule group: Industrial building rules
Select connection parameters for tube gusset (20)
1.
Click Setup > AutoDefaults… to open the AutoDefaults setup dialog box.
2.
Right-click in the dialog and select New rule group, and a rule group named New appears.
3.
Select the New rule group, press the F2 key and type: Industrial building rules.
1.
Browse to Industrial building rules > Components 4 > Tube gusset (20).
2.
Select the standard.j120 parameters, right-click and pick Select connection parameters…
3.
Select the Wall bracings and click OK
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Creating System Components for Steel
19
The Tube gusset (20) connection will now use Wall bracing parameters in all cases
Create new rule sets for end plate
1.
Browse to Industrial building rules > Components 1 > End plate (144).
2.
Right-click the connection Endplate (144) and select Create additional rule sets.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Creating System Components for Steel
20
3.
Two rule sets: New and Default appear in the tree. By default, both rule sets have standard connection properties selected.
IPE 600 rule set Add rule to rule set New
Enter name for rule set
1.
Right-click the rule set New and select Edit rule set... to open the AutoDefault Rules dialog box.
2.
Select the rule Secondary 1 profile from the Available rules list.
3.
Click the right arrow button to move the selected rule into the list of rules in the rule set.
4.
In the right pane under Exact value, fill in IPE600.
5.
Enter a name for the rule set: Secondary IPE600.
6.
Click OK.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Creating System Components for Steel
21
We have used the End plate (144) connection both in beam to column web and beam to column flange cases so the rule will now be used in both cases. We could make this rule to work only in beam to beam flange cases by setting another rule: Secondary beam to beam flange TRUE.
Select connection parameters
7.
Select the standard.j144 parameters, right-click and pick Select connection parameters…
8.
This opens Attribute file list in which all the saved properties for connection 144 are listed.
9.
Select the 8_bolt_rows properties and click OK.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Creating System Components for Steel
22
IPE 500 rule set We will now create another rule set for IPE500 taking advantage of the IPE600 rule set we just created. Copy and modify rule set
1.
Select the rules set Secondary IPE600, right-click and select Copy rule set.
2.
While the rule set Secondary IPE600 is still selected, right-click again and select Paste rule set.
We now have two identical rule sets.
3.
Select the upper Secondary IPE600 rule set, right-click and select Edit rule set…
4.
Modify the value in the rule to IPE500 and the Rule set name to Secondary IPE500 and click OK.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Creating System Components for Steel
23
5.
Select the properties 8_bolt_rows under the rule set Secondary IPE500, right-click and pick Select connection parameters…
6.
Select the parameters: 7_bolt_rows and click OK.
7.
Finally click OK in the AutoDefaults setup dialog box.
Now the new AutoDefaults rules are ready for use.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Creating System Components for Steel
24
2.7 Use AutoDefaults Rules We will now use the Industrial building rules created to automatically apply the correct properties to the existing End plate (144) connections.
Switch the AutoDefaults on in the end plate connections 1.
Open the End plate (144) connection dialog box.
2.
On the General tab select Industrial building rules.
3.
Click the on/off button and tick only the Rule Group check box.
4.
Check that the Ignore other types is selected.
5.
Save as ipe600.
6.
Select all of the connections in the model.
7.
Click Modify. Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Creating System Components for Steel
25
Since all the secondaries in our end plate connection are IPE600, they all pass the Secondary IPE 600 rule and result in having the same properties, 8_bolt_rows.
Change profiles – AutoDefaults react Let’s now assume that first and second floor beams on gridlines 4 and 7 don't have as much load as others and we can change their profiles to IPE500. Change the profiles
1.
Double-click one of the beams selected in the figure below to open the beam properties dialog box.
2.
Change the profile to IPE500 and tick only the profile check box.
3.
Select the four beams shown highlighted in the figure below and click Modify.
You can see that the connections in the modified beams were updated to have 7 rows of bolts.
Inquire the properties used
1.
Select one of the connection symbols of the changed profiles.
2.
Right-click and select Inquire.
From the inquire object dialog box you can check which rule group, particular rule and connection attributes were used.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Creating System Components for Steel
26
Check clashing again Now that we have connected all the steel parts in our model we will run the clash check again. Check clashing
1.
Select all of the parts by dragging an area select around the whole model.
2.
Right-click and select Clash check.
To quickly locate and view colliding parts in the model, select a line containing the ID numbers of colliding parts from the list. Tekla Structures highlights the parts in the model.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Creating System Components for Steel
27
Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing
Tekla Structures 12.0 Basic Training September 19, 2006 Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
Contents
Contents ................................................................................................................................. i
3
Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing...................................................................... 3 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6
Create a Cast Unit .....................................................................................................................3 Create a Brace Connection from Scratch ..................................................................................7 Create a Brace Connection with a Custom Part ......................................................................19 Create a Column Shoe and an Anchor Bolt Connection..........................................................23 Create Interactive Reinforcements ..........................................................................................31 Create Cuts Interactively .........................................................................................................42
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing
i
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing
ii
3
In this lesson
Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing
Tekla Structures covers a great variety of the connection and reinforcement components used in most projects. However, you may come across situations where it's not possible to make the necessary detail in your model using the system components. In this lesson we will practice interactive detailing. We will create interactive reinforcements, cast units, embeds, column shoe connections and cuts.
3.1 Create a Cast Unit As we learned in lesson 2, the corbel connection component automatically included the corbel in the column cast unit. However, often cast units need to be created interactively. You might need to create a complicated concrete shape out of many separate parts and then merge them into one cast unit. For more information on cast units see help file: Help: Modeling > Parts > Cast units and assemblies > Working with cast units
Clean model views
1.
Double-click on the background of the 3D view to open view properties.
2.
Click Display.
3.
Turn off points, reinforcements, cuts, fittings and component symbols.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing
3
Select in-situ beams
4.
Click Modify.
5.
Click OK on View properties dialog.
1.
Turn on the part select switch.
2.
Click select filter.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing
4
3.
Use part name to filter beams only.
4.
Click OK to accept the settings. Tekla Structures has also pre-defined select filters, which you can find from the drop down menu next to select filter icon e.g. "BEAM_CONCRETE" filters according to BEAM name and CONCRETE material. You can easily create more pre-defined select filters, just do save as on select filter dialog.
Create cast unit
5.
Rotate the 3D view so that it is easy to select the in-situ beams.
6.
Window-select the beams.
7.
Right-click, select Cast unit > Create cast unit.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing
5
The cast unit is colored cyan. The main part of the cast unit is colored magenta. The main part can be changed by selecting any part, right-click, select Set as new main part of assembly.
Turn off select switches
8.
Click on the arrow on the select toolbar to view the drop-down menu.
9.
Select standard on the select filter drop-down menu to load the standard values.
Remember that you can always check the cast unit by holding down the Alt key and selecting a part. Alt + Select
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing
6
3.2 Create a Brace Connection from Scratch We are going to create a fastening plate by creating all the separate parts and welding them into an assembly. This embed plate is then added to a cast unit. Braces are fitted and sitewelded to the fastening plate to finalize the connection. 1.
Open the view G RI D A.
2.
Pick a work area around the brace connection at gridline 3.
Create steel plate Define plate parameters
1.
Double-click on the Create beam icon to open the beam properties dialog.
2.
Apply the properties for the fastening plate as shown in the dialog box below.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing
7
Locate start position
3.
Hold down the Ctrl key and pick a reference point from the middle of the braces.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing
8
4.
While still holding down the Ctrl key, pick another reference point from the edge of the column.
5.
Right mouse click and select snap override Near.
6.
Let the cursor snap (do not pick) to the edge of the column below the previous point.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing
9
Locate end position
7.
Type 450 (the Enter a numeric location dialog will open automatically)
8.
Press Enter.
9.
Right mouse click and select snap override Near again.
10. Let the cursor snap (do not pick) to the edge of the column above the previous point.
11. Type 900. 12. Press Enter.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing
10
The plate will appear in the correct location. 13. Interrupt.
Create stud Next we will create steel parts for studs. We will create one completed stud with welds, and then move and copy it to the correct locations.
Create the body of the stud
14. Change the beam properties of the studs as shown in the dialog box below.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing
11
15. Click Apply (leaving the dialog open).
In plane view (2D), the picking of start/end points is always to view plane in depth wise (in this situation to grid A). So in order to place the stud in correct position we need define starting point 50mm into the view. We can do this with reference point Define start and end positions
16. Hold down the Ctrl and pick a reference point at the bottom inner corner of the plate. 17. Type 0, 50, 50 (direction x, y, z). 18. Press Enter 19. Type 100, 0, 0. (this creates end point 100mm in x direction) 20. Press Enter
The body of the stud is created. Create the head of the stud
1.
Change the profile to D30.
2.
Click OK.
Define start and end positions
3.
Turn the view to 3D with Ctrl+P
4.
Pick starting point at the end of the stud.
5.
Type 15, 0, 0. (this creates end point 15mm in x direction)
6.
Click Enter.
7.
Interrupt the command. Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing
12
The parts of the stud are created.
Create welds Next we are going to weld the stud head to the stud body. The stud is then welded to the plate. This will create an embed assembly. Help: Modeling > Detailing > Detailing commands > Weld Define weld parameters
1.
Double-click on the Create weld icon.
2.
Apply the settings as shown below.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing
13
Pick parts to be welded
3.
Click OK.
4.
Pick the body of the stud (the primary part for the first weld).
5.
Pick the head of the stud (the secondary part for the first weld).
6.
Pick the plate (the primary part for the second weld).
7.
Pick the body of the stud (the secondary part for the second weld).
It is very important to enter the welding order correctly. Tekla Structures uses the welding order to determine the primary and secondary parts of the assembly. This affects the position of the parts in the drawings.
Inquire assembly
You can check assemblies using the command Inquire Assembly. 1.
Pick the plate (or any part of the assembly).
2.
Right-click and select Inquire > Assembly.
The main part of the assembly will appear red and other parts will appear yellow.
To select the entire assembly: press the Alt key while clicking on a part in the assembly.
Copy studs Next we will copy the stud to the correct locations to complete the embed. Select part to be copied
1.
Select the stud and welds with a window from left to right
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing
14
Copy
Select parts to be copied and copy
2.
Right-click and select Copy special > Translate -100 mm in y direction.
3.
Click Copy.
4.
Interrupt.
5.
Select both studs and welds with a window from left to right (exactly like in step 1).
6.
Right-click, select Copy special > Translate 4 times 200 mm in z direction.
7.
Click Copy.
8.
Interrupt.
9.
Check the assembly.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing
15
Adding embed to cast unit Next we will add the embed to the cast unit. For more information on cast units see help file: Help: Modeling > Parts > Cast units and assemblies > Working with cast units
10. Turn on the select assemblies switch.
11. Pick the embed (all the parts of embed are highlighted). 12. Right-click, select Assembly > Add as sub-assembly. 13. Pick the column.
The embed has been added to the column cast unit.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing
16
Create fitting We will use the Fitting command to trim the braces at the embed. The Fitting tool will trim the end of the part on a plane perpendicular to the view plane, which is defined by picking 2 points on a line. Help: Modeling > Detailing > Fine-tuning part shape > Fitting
Define cut line
1.
Click the Create fitting icon.
2.
Window-select the braces to be fitted.
3.
Pick the points on the plate corners to set the cutting line for the fitting.
Define the fitting line with two points.
The selected parts have been fitted.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing
17
Creating site welds To finalize the connection we will create a site weld between the brace and the embed. The site weld will not create an assembly, but the weld can be called automatically into drawings. Help: Modeling > Detailing > Detailing commands > Weld Define weld parameters
1.
Double-click on the Create weld icon.
2.
Apply the settings as shown below.
Pick parts to be welded
3.
Pick the first brace.
4.
Pick the plate.
5.
Repeat for the other brace.
The connection has been finalized. In lesson 4 we will create a custom component out of the embed and the connection.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing
18
3.3 Create a Brace Connection with a Custom Part Next we will create a similar connection at the bottom end of the brace on gridline 2, but this time we will use a predefined custom component embed. In lesson 4 we will cover creation and use of custom components in more detail. For more information on cast units, see help file: help: Detailing > Custom components Importing custom components
1.
Open the component catalog.
2.
Right-click, select Import….
3.
Select the fastener plate file (in Finland: SBK L-K L
-JPL -PK L fastening plates.uel)
Note! You need to have predefined custom components files downloaded in order to complete this task!
Define custom part parameters
4.
Search SBKL on Component catalog menu.
5.
Double-click on the SBKL component.
6.
Select and load the SBKL200x300 settings.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing
19
Insert custom part
7.
Click OK.
1.
At the bottom of the column at grid intersection A2, pick the insertion point at the intersection of the column edge and the brace center line (use fully rendered view Ctrl+4).
2.
Pick a point below the insertion point to show the direction of the component.
Change the transparency with Ctrl+2 to see the inserted component. Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing
20
Next we will add the embed to the cast unit just like before. Note: component itself can't be added to the cast unit, so we need to select the objects inside the component. Select parts
Add parts to cast unit
3.
Activate the Select assemblies icon on the select toolbar.
4.
Pick the custom component (all the parts of the embed are highlighted).
5.
Right-click, select Assembly > Add as sub-assembly.
6.
Pick the column.
To finalize this connection we will fit the brace and site-weld it to the plate – just like we did earlier when we created a brace connection from scratch. Fit the brace
Site weld
1.
Click the Create fitting icon.
2.
Select the brace to be fitted.
3.
Pick the points on the plate corners to set the cut line for the fitting.
1.
Activate the Create weld icon (previous site-weld settings are still applied).
2.
Pick the brace.
3.
Pick the plate.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing
21
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing
22
3.4 Create a Column Shoe and an Anchor Bolt Connection Next we will create a connection which will make column shoes and anchor bolts, and cut the column according to the column shoes. We will use predefined custom parts for the column shoes and anchor bolts. In lesson 4 we will cover the creation and use of custom components in more detail. For more information on cast units, see help file: help: Detailing > Custom components
Importing custom components
1.
Open the component catalog.
2.
Right-click, select Import….
3.
Select the column shoe file (in Finland: HPK M -PPK M -PEC column shoes.uel).
4.
Right-click, Import….
5.
This time, select anchor bolt file (in Finland: HPM-PPM anchor bolts.uel).
6.
Select custom on the drop-down menu to display custom components.
Next we will insert a column shoe and an anchor bolt at the edge of the column at grid A-7. We will first insert the components and then move them to the correct location. Inserting the components
1.
Click once on the HPKM24 column shoe to activate it.
2.
Pick the corner of the column.
3.
Type 0, -1, 0 to define the direction of the component.
4.
Click OK or Enter.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing
23
5.
Interrupt.
6.
Repeat same steps for anchor bolt HPM24L.
Now we will move the components to the correct location, but first we will have to make sure that we select the whole components, not the parts inside the components. Move the components to correct location
1.
Press the Select component icon on the select toolbar.
2.
Select the column shoe.
3.
Right-click, Move special > Translate.
4.
G ive t he necessary values in the dX and dY fields as shown below.
5.
Click Move.
6.
Interrupt. Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing
24
7.
Now select the anchor bolt.
8.
Type the necessary dZ =80 value into the Move dialog (the dX and dY values are the same as those of the column shoe).
9.
Click Move.
10. Interrupt.
The column shoe and the anchor bolt are now in the correct location.
Next we will create a very small cutting part with the Concrete slab command, which we will use for cutting the column corner according to the column shoe. Create a cutting part
1.
Hide the column shoe and the anchor bolt.
2.
Double-click on the Create concrete slab icon.
3.
Define a 210 mm thick slab.
4.
Define the slab position to Front with -10 mm offset.
5.
Pick the corner of the column.
6.
Let the cursor snap to the other corner of the column (do not pick).
7.
Type 100.
8.
Select perpendicular snap override (right-click) and let the cursor snap to the opposite edge of the column.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing
25
9.
Type 100.
10. Select perpendicular snap override again and let the cursor snap to the edge of the column according to the picture.
11. Type 100. 12. Click the middle mouse button to close the polygon.
13. Interrupt.
We now need to move the cutting part to the correct position and round the corner. Open the view at elevation +0 to see the needed distance better.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing
26
Move the slab
Round corner of the slab
1.
Select cutting part.
2.
Right-click, Move special > Translate.
3.
Define dX = 7 mm and dY = -7 mm.
4.
Click Move.
5.
Double-click on the chamfer at the back corner to open the Chamfer properties dialog.
6.
Select the rounded corner option and define the radius as 15 mm.
7.
Click Modify.
Next we will copy-rotate the column shoe, anchor bolt and cutting part 3 times to the other corners of the column. Redraw the view to bring back the hidden column shoe and anchor bolt. Copy rotate
1.
Select the parts.
2.
Right-click, Copy special > Rotate.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing
27
3.
Pick the grid intersection as the rotation origin.
4.
Define the number of copies as 3 and rotation angle as 90.
5.
Click Copy.
The column shoe and the anchor bolts are now at each corner of the column.
Now we need to cut the column according to the cutting part and then delete the parts. (In section 3.6 cut options are explained in more detail.) Create cuts
1.
Activate the part cut command.
2.
Pick the column.
3.
Click on the cutting part.
4.
Repeat to all the corners.
5.
Delete all the cutting parts.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing
28
To finalize the connection we will add the column shoes to the column cast unit and the anchor bolts to the pad footing cast unit. Select parts
Add parts to cast unit
1.
Activate the Select components icon on the select toolbar.
2.
Hold down Ctrl and pick all four column shoes (all the parts are highlighted).
3.
Right-click, Assembly > Add as sub-assembly.
4.
Pick the column.
The column shoes have been added to the column cast unit. 5.
Repeat to the anchor bolts.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing
29
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing
30
3.5 Create Interactive Reinforcements In lesson 2 we created reinforcements with system components. You may need to do some reinforcing interactively to complete reinforcing. Tekla Structures has multiple options for reinforcement creation. In this lesson we will use rebar groups to complete in-situ slab reinforcement at the first floor on gridline A between gridlines 5 and 6. See more about reinforcements in Tekla Structures help: Detailing > Reinforcement > Single bars, bar groups, and meshes > Reinforcing bar and help: Detailing > Reinforcement > Single bars, bar groups, and meshes > Reinforcing bar group
First we will create two rebars tying the in-situ slab together with the hollow-core slabs. Define rebar parameters
1.
Double-click on the Create reinforcing bar group icon.
2.
Click Select… to define the rebar size and grade. The bending radius is defined automatically according to the rebar.
3.
Select 10 mm main reinforcement.
4.
Click OK on the Select reinforcing bar dialog.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing
31
Define rebar shape
5.
Use the No hook option for both ends.
6.
Define the first and last segment leg length as 1000 mm as shown below.
7.
Define a group of 2 with equal distribution on the Group tab page.
8.
Close the dialog with OK.
9.
Pick the slab at the first floor.
10. Define a U-shaped poly-line as shown below. You can pick the start and end positions at any locations (use near snap override), because the segment length has been defined as 1000 mm.
11. Click the middle mouse button to end defining the rebar shape.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing
32
Define rebar group direction
12. Define the group direction with two points as shown below.
The reinforcements are created after the second pick. Next, we will copy-mirror the reinforcements to the other end of the slab. 1.
Select the reinforcements.
2.
Right-click, Copy special > Mirror.
3.
Indicate the mirror line at the middle of the slab with two points.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing
33
The reinforcements are mirrored.
Next we are going to create a reinforcing bar group for the other direction. Create rebar group
1.
Double-click on the Create reinforcing bar group icon.
2.
Click Select… to define the rebar size and grade. The bending radius is defined automatically according to the rebar.
3.
Select the 10 mm stirrup reinforcement.
4.
Click OK on the Select reinforcing bar dialog.
5.
Use the 50 mm long 135-degree custom hook with 20mm radius.
6.
Define 25 mm cover thickness in the on-plane direction and 25 mm in the from-plane direction.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing
34
7.
G o to the Group tab page.
8.
Define the group creation method as exact spacing with flexible first and last space. Set intervals to 200 using normal group type.
9.
Close the dialog by clicking OK.
10. Pick the in-situ slab. 11. Now define the rebar shape. This time we need to pick the points at the corners of the slab.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing
35
12. Click the middle mouse button to end defining the rebar shape. 13. Next define the group location by picking the start and end positions at the long side corners.
The rebars are created after the second pick.
Clash check
Redraw the window and if necessary turn on reinforcing from the view settings. 1.
Click the Select objects in components icon. Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing
36
2.
Select the reinforcements and the slab.
3.
Right-click, Clash check.
In case of collision, a list will open to indicate the id numbers of the colliding rebars. Select the first row and those colliding rebars will be highlighted in the model. As you can see, the mesh collides with the L rebar and the stirrups also collide also with the L rebar. Open the G R ID 5 view and the elevation view +3850.
Modify stirrups
1.
Double-click on the stirrups.
2.
Change the cover thickness of the second segment to 35.
3.
Change the From plane distance to 45.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing
37
4.
Click Modify.
The U bars cover thicknesses change as shown above. The L shaped bar is still colliding with the mesh and the stirrups so we need to modify it further. Modify L shaped rebars
1.
Double-click on the L rebar.
2.
Change the From plane distance to 45. Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing
38
3.
Click Modify.
The L bar cover thicknesses change as shown above. Run the clash check again and continue modifications if necessary.
Next we will copy the reinforcements to elevation +7350. Copy reinforcements to upper elevation
1.
Delete the slab at elevation +7350.
2.
Hold down Alt and select the slab at +3850 (slab and reinforcements will be highlighted).
3.
Right-click, Copy special > Translate.
4.
Set dZ = 3500.
5.
Click Copy.
Next we will create seam reinforcements between hollow-core slabs on the first floor. 1.
Open the view at elevation +3850.
2.
Double-click on the Create reinforcing bar group icon. (See settings on the dialog below)
3.
Change the name to SEAM_ REBAR.
4.
Click Select to define the rebar size and grade. The bending radius is defined automatically according to the rebar.
5.
Select 12 mm main reinforcement.
6.
Click OK on the Select reinforcing bar dialog.
7.
Change class to 4.
8.
Turn off hooks.
9.
Define 50 mm cover thickness for the On plane direction and 0 for other directions.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing
39
10. Change the rebar group to exact spacing and define 8 spaces. 11. Apply.
12. Pick the hollow-core slab next to the in-situ slab (in plan view, above the in-situ slab). 13. Use the following snap settings: 14. Hold down Ctrl and pick a reference point (1) between the hollow-core slabs close to the corner of the in-situ slab. 15. Type 1200. 16. Let the cursor snap to the right between the slabs. 17. Type 2400. Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing
40
18. Click the middle mouse button. 19. Show the range to reinforce with two points.
20. Interrupt.
Next we will detach the seam rebars from the hollow-core slab that we picked while creating the rebars. Otherwise, the seam reinforcements would be shown in the cast unit drawing created for that hollow-core slab. 1.
Select the seam rebars.
2.
Right-click, Detach from part.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing
41
3.6 Create Cuts Interactively You can cut parts by various methods in Tekla Structures. The available cuts are: x
Line cut
x
Polygon cut
x
Part cut
There are numerous places in our model in which the parts are still colliding with each other, and the shape of the parts needs to be modified with the cutting tools. We will use these cutting tools to cut the concrete slabs with the silos (part cut) and then create a penetration for a column (polygon cut) through a hollow-core slab.
Create part cuts for silos
Create part cut
1.
On the View properties dialog, Display…, check that cuts are visible.
2.
Click on the Create part cut icon.
3.
Pick one of the slabs as the part to be cut.
4.
Pick the related silo as the cutting part. Click the middle mouse button.
5.
The slab is now cut. A striped antimatter part cut the same size as the silo appears.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing
42
Change part cut profile
In order to have clearance between the concrete slab and the silo we will now modify the size of the profile used to make the part cut. 1.
Disable all the selection switches except for the Select cuts switch. This will make it easier to select the part cut.
2.
Double-click on the part cut.
3.
The Column properties dialog box appears.
4.
Uncheck all the modify check boxes and change the profile as shown in the dialog below:
5.
Click Modify.
This creates a 150 mm gap all the way around between the slab and the silo.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing
43
The part cut height is still equal to the height of the cutting part (= the silo). Sometimes it is more convenient to work with shorter part cuts. By inquiring the slab (select object, right-click, select Inquire > Part) you can see that the slab bottom level is +13400 and top level +13575. Change part cut height
Double-click on the part cut to open the Column properties dialog box. On the Position tab page: 1.
Change the bottom level to 13000 and top level to 13800.
2.
Click Modify.
Now the part cut is just a little thicker than the slab, which is enough.
Copy the part cut to the other silo
3.
Copy it 9000 mm in the x direction to the other silo.
The antimaterial part will automatically adjust to the new situation and cut the other slab.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing
44
Interactive Steel Detailing
Tekla Structures 12.0 Basic Training September 21, 2006 Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
Contents
Contents..................................................................................................................................i
3
Interactive Steel Detailing ...........................................................................................3 3.1 3.2 3.3
Create Gusset Plate with Stiffeners Interactively.......................................................................3 Create an End Plate Connection from Scratch ........................................................................10 Create Cuts Interactively .........................................................................................................24
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Contents
i
3
In this lesson
Interactive Steel Detailing
Tekla Structures system components cover a great variety of the components used in most projects. However, you may come across situations where it's not possible to make the necessary connections in your model using the system components. In this chapter we will take advantage of the Tekla Structures tube gusset connection by using it as a base for a connection. We will explode the system component, modify the ungrouped objects and then add objects to the connection using a system component detail. We will also create a whole new connection (i.e. all connection objects: parts, welds, bolts and cuts) interactively from scratch without using any system components.
3.1 Create Gusset Plate with Stiffeners Interactively In Tekla Structures there is no gusset plate system component available in which you can get the stiffeners included in the connection. You can, however, create the stiffeners separately by using a system component detail. We will explode an existing tube gusset connection, modify the gusset plate shape and then create stiffeners in the connection using a system component detail. Near the bottom end of the column at grid A-2 is a Tube Gusset (20) connection.
In the figure on the left we see the connection before the stiffeners have been added. In the figure on the right we see how the connection will look after the stiffeners have been added.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing
3
Create component basic views
Select the component symbol, right-click and select Create view > Component basic views.
Explode gusset plate connection Inside of the system connection we are not able to reshape the gusset plate the way it is shown in the figure above. In situations where the connection parameters do not contain a particular option, we must edit the parts outside of the connection. In order to modify connection objects outside the connection, we need to explode the connection. Exploding ungroups the objects in a connection. Modifications when done outside of the connection dialog without first exploding the connection will result in the changes being overwritten if the connection were to get updated. Before exploding the connection you should take advantage of the connection to get as close to the desired result as possible since editing connection macros is faster and easier than editing objects outside the connection.
Explode connection
To explode the connection: Select gusset plate’s connection symbol, right-click and select Explode component. All connection objects (even if they are set to "not visible" in the view properties) will become visible. Now all of these objects have lost intelligence and association to the connection dialog.
Reshape the gusset plate We will now reshape the gusset plate as shown in the figure below by editing the polygon plate using the Edit polygon shape command.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing
4
Create a construction line
We will first create a temporary construction line to help to locate the bottom right corner of the gusset plate. 1.
Click the Create construction line icon.
2.
Pick the top right corner of the gusset plate as the starting point of the line.
3.
Type 0,0,-500 to define the end point of the construction line (-500 mm in the z direction from the last picked point).
As you type, the Enter a numeric location dialog box is automatically displayed.
4.
Press Enter and the construction line is created
Instead of recreating the polygon plate we will now reshape the existing plate by using the Create line cut command.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing
5
Help: Modeling > Detailing > Detailing commands > Detailing>Line cut Edit polygon shape
1.
Select the Create line cut icon and follow the instructions on the command line.
2.
Pick the gusset plate as the part to be cut.
3.
Pick the intersection of the gusset plate edge and the construction line.
4.
Snap to the perpendicular point on the gusset plate edge and pick point. (Make sure you pick the plate edge and not the gridline).
5.
Pick the bottom corner as the side to be removed. The plate is now reshaped.
The construction line is no longer needed and you can delete it.
Add stiffeners We will now add stiffeners to our connection using the Multiple Stiffeners (1064) detail. When we open the detail’s dialog box we can see which options are available to us for creating the stiffeners. In this case we are interested in setting the stiffener spacing and the edge distance from the edge of the stiffener to the edge of the column. We can then measure the column to get the parameters exactly as desired. Measure dimensions
1.
Take the following measurements in the model: Click the Create X measure icon, pick the points and a place for the dimension as shown below:
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing
6
Create stiffeners using macro
2.
Click the Create Y measure icon, pick the points and a place for the dimension as shown below:
1.
Open the component catalog (Ctrl+F) and find the Multiple stiffeners (1064) component. Double-click on the component icon.
2.
Edit the fields shown highlighted on each of the tab pages below and click Apply (study the association with the dimensions taken in the model and note the tolerances).
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing
7
3.
Pick the column.
4.
Pick the midpoint of the gusset plate, and the stiffeners are created.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing
8
You can see the final result in the figures below.
We could now explode the stiffener detail but since we have not edited the connection objects except for the detail we can also just leave it. In the next lesson, Lesson 4: Custom element, you will learn to group objects in your own user-defined connections.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing
9
3.2 Create an End Plate Connection from Scratch Sometimes you may need to create all the objects for a connection interactively from scratch. As an example we will now create plates, a polygon cut, a fitting, a bolt group and welds interactively in order to create the connection shown below.
Create plate and fitting for the beam At grid intersection B-3 at level 13400: Create connection basic views and delete the connection
1.
Select the existing end plate connection, right-click and select Create view > Component basic views.
2.
Delete the existing connection.
Create end plate for the beam
We will now use the beam command to create the end plate for the beam.
1.
Start the beam command and Apply the properties for the end plate shown in the dialog box below.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing
10
It is possible to create plates by using either the beam or the contour plate command.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing
11
In the Component front view: 2.
Hold down the Ctrl key and pick the intersection of the beam lower flange and the column flange (1) to set the “From” location coordinates.
3.
Then use the cursor to snap (do not pick!) at the top right corner of the column (2) to set the correct direction.
4.
Type 10 for the numeric location (the Enter a numeric location dialog box will open automatically) and press Enter.
The cursor picks to the desired start position (which equals 10 mm from point 1 in the direction of point 2).
5.
To pick the end position, hold down the Ctrl key and pick position (2). Then use the cursor to snap to position (1). Type 10 for the numeric location and press Enter (which equals 10 mm from point 2 in the direction of point 1).
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing
12
The plate then appears. Fit the end of a beam
We will use the Fitting command to trim the end of the beam at the end plate. The Fitting tool will trim the end of the beam on a plane perpendicular to the view plane, which is defined by picking two points on a line. Help: Modeling > Detailing > Fine-tuning part shape > Fitting 1.
Click on the Create fitting icon.
2.
Select the beam as the part to be fitted.
3.
Pick the points on the end plate corners to set the cut line for the fitting.
Tekla Structures displays the fitting in the model using a blue fitting symbol.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing
13
Create a plate for the column We will now use the Create contour plate command to create a plate for the column. We will use the Component end view for ease of picking points to place the plate. We will then move the plate to the correct depth. Help: Modeling > Parts > Steel parts commands > Contour plate
Create column plate
1.
Start the Create contour plate command.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing
14
2.
Apply the properties for the plate as shown below:
In the Component end view: 3.
Let the cursor snap to the top left corner of the end plate and type z to lock the z coordinate.
4.
Hold down the Ctrl key and pick the top left corner of the column to set the “From” location coordinates.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing
15
5.
Let the cursor snap to the inner side of the flange shown, type 5 and press Enter.
The first point for the plate is now picked.
6.
Hold down the Ctrl key and pick the top right corner of the column to set the “From” location coordinates.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing
16
7.
Let the cursor snap to the inner side of the flange, type 5 and press Enter.
8.
The second point is now picked.
9.
Press z to release the coordinate lock.
10. Let the cursor snap to the bottom right corner of the end plate and type z to lock the z coordinate.
11. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to pick the third point for the plate. 12. Repeat steps 6 and 7 to pick the last position for the plate. 13. Press z to release the coordinate. Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing
17
14. Press the middle button to create the plate. The plate is created in the view plane of the Component end view.
Move the plate
1.
Select the column connection plate, right-click and select Move > Translate...
2.
Move the plate in the x direction (and only x) so that it is next to the end plate.
Fitting the column The column connection plate is now in the correct position but it collides with the column flanges. We will use the Create part cut command to cut the column with the plate. We will then enlarge the antimatter cut to add some clearance between the plate and the column flanges. Help: Modeling > Detailing > Detailing commands > Detailing>Part cut Create part cut for the column
1.
Click the Create part cut icon.
2.
Pick the column as the part to be cut.
3.
Pick the plate as the cutting part.
The column is now cut exactly along the edges of the connection plate.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing
18
We will next enlarge the antimatter cut. Since the column connection plate and the part cut are now in exactly the same space, it would be hard to select the correct chamfers to modify.
That's why we will temporarily hide the column connection plate and then move the cut chamfers. Move the cut chamfers
1.
Select the column connection plate (only the plate, using select switch Select parts shown below), right-click and select Hide.
2.
Turn the Select all select switch back on. Select both upper chamfers (using Ctrl).
3.
Move the chamfers 20 mm upwards.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing
19
4.
Select the lower chamfers and move them 5 mm downwards.
5.
Select the right side chamfers and move them 20 mm right.
6.
Select the left side chamfers, move them 20 mm left.
Create welds Next we will weld the end plate to the beam and the column connection plate to the column. This will also add the plates to the beam and column assemblies. Help: Modeling > Detailing > Detailing commands > Weld Weld column plate to the beam
1.
Double-click on the Create weld icon.
2.
Edit the Weld properties dialog as shown below and click OK.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing
20
3.
Select the beam as the part to weld to (the primary part for workshop welds).
4.
Select the end plate as the part to be welded (the secondary part for workshop welds). It is very important to enter the welding order correctly. Tekla Structures uses the welding order to determine the primary and secondary parts of the assembly. This affects the position of the parts in the drawings.
Inquire assembly
You can check assemblies using the command Inquire Assembly. 1.
Pick the beam (or any part of the assembly).
2.
Right-click and select Inquire > Assembly.
The main part of the assembly will appear red and other parts will appear yellow. To select the entire assembly: press the Alt key while clicking a part in the assembly.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing
21
If your weld was not automatically placed in the desired position, you can manually affect the location by setting the desired position for the weld in the Weld properties dialog box.
Weld connection plate to the column
By using the applied weld properties, weld the connection plate to the column.
Create bolt group Next we will create a bolt group to connect the beam to the column. We will use the bolts to bolt the beam’s end plate to the column’s connection plate. For information on bolt group dimensions see: Help: Modeling > Detailing > Bolts > Creating a bolt group Create bolts
1.
Double-click on the Create bolts icon.
2.
Define bolt group properties as shown in the picture below and Apply.
3.
Pick the column connection plate as the part to bolt to.
4.
Pick the end plate as the part to be bolted. Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing
22
5.
Click the middle mouse button to finish selecting parts.
6.
Pick the end plate top point as the first point (this will be the bolt group origin).
7.
Pick the end plate bottom point as the second point (this will indicate the bolt group's x direction).
The bolt group has now been created and the final connection looks like in the figures below.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing
23
3.3 Create Cuts Interactively You can cut parts by various methods in Tekla Structures. The available cuts are: x
Line cut
x
Polygon cut
x
Part cut
There are numerous places in our model in which the parts are still colliding with each other, and the shape of the parts needs to be modified with the cutting tools. We will use these cutting tools to cut the concrete slabs with the Silos (part cut) and then create a penetration for a column (polygon cut) through a hollow-core slab.
Create part cuts for silos
Create part cut
1.
Click the Create part cut icon.
2.
Pick one of the slabs as the part to be cut.
3.
Pick the related silo as the cutting part. Click on the middle mouse button.
4.
The slab is now cut. A blue antimatter part cut the same size as the silo appears.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing
24
Change part cut profile
In order to have clearance between the concrete slab and the silo we will now modify the size of the profile used to make the part cut. 1.
Disable all of the selection switches except for the Select cuts switch. This makes it easier to select the part cut.
2.
Double-click on the part cut.
3.
The Column properties dialog box appears.
4.
Uncheck all the modify check boxes and change only the profile as shown in the dialog below:
5.
Click Modify.
This creates a 150 mm gap all the way around between the slab and the silo.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing
25
The part cut height is still equal to the height of the cutting part (= the silo). Sometimes it is more convenient to work with shorter part cuts. By inquiring the slab (select object, right-click, select Inquire > Part) you can see that the slab bottom level is +13400 and top level +13575. Change part cut height
Double-click on the blue part cut to open the Column properties dialog box. On the Position tab page:
1.
Change the bottom level to 13000 and top level to 13800.
2.
Click Modify.
Now the part cut is just a little thicker than the slab, which is enough.
Copy the part cut to the other silo
1.
Copy it 9000 mm in the x direction to the other silo.
The antimatter part will automatically adjust to the new situation and cut the other slab.
Create slab penetration (polygon cut) We will now create a penetration through a slab using a polygon cut. We will create a 20 mm clearance between the penetrating column and the slab simply by picking positions to outline the polygon cut. You should always define the polygon so that there is some tolerance between the edges of the part and the edges of the cut. If the edge of a cutting polygon is in exactly the same position as the edge of the part to be cut, it can be unclear whether the edge should be cut away.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing
26
Help: Modeling > Detailing > Detailing commands > Polygon cut Create polygon cut
1.
In the view +3850 zoom close to the column on grid A-4.
2.
Click the Create polygon cut icon.
3.
Select the hollow-core slab as the part to be cut.
4.
Hold down the Ctrl key and pick the bottom left corner of the column to set the “From” location coordinates.
5.
Type -20,-20, Press Enter, the cursor picks the point.
6.
Press o (to snap to positions in orthogonal directions).
7.
Move the cursor to the right to the track along the ortho line.
8.
Enter 340 to specify the distance from the last point picked. Press Enter.
9.
Move the cursor upwards, type 330 and press Enter.
10. Move the cursor to the left, type 340 and press Enter. Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing
27
11. Click the middle mouse button to create the polygon cut.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing
28
Custom Components for Precast Concrete
Tekla Structures 12.0 Basic Training September 19, 2006 Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
Contents
Contents..................................................................................................................................i
4
Custom Components for Precast Concrete ..............................................................3 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5
Define Custom Part of Fastener Plate .......................................................................................3 Define Brace Fastener Plate Custom Connections ...................................................................8 Use Your New Custom Connections in the Model...................................................................12 Define User_Hole_Creation Custom Detail .............................................................................16 Parameterize User_Hole_Creation Custom Detail ..................................................................20
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Contents
i
4
In this lesson
Custom Components for Precast Concrete
Tekla Structures contains a set of tools for defining intelligent connections, parts, seams, and details, called custom components. Help: Detailing >Custom components In this lesson we will define few custom components (a custom part, two custom connections and one custom detail) then use the custom components in the model and finally edit the custom detail a little to make it parametric. You will learn how to: x
Define custom components
x
Use custom components
x
Edit custom component to make them parametric
4.1 Define Custom Part of Fastener Plate You can build custom components (connection, part, detail or seam) either by exploding and modifying an existing component, or by creating the component objects individually as we did in lesson 3. You then define a custom component by picking the objects to include in the custom component, and specifying the information the user needs to input, for example, main part, secondary parts, or points they need to pick. You can then apply the custom component to similar framing conditions in the model. We will now create a custom part from the fastener plate, which was interactively created in Lesson 3. By changing the group of objects to a custom component we can use it in other places of the model inside other custom components and in other models. In next chapter we will use this custom part as a sub component in a custom connection Help: Detailing >Custom components >Defining custo m components >Defining a custom component
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Precast Concrete
3
Clean model view
1. Turn off Reinforcing bars and fittings in the 3D view and display the rest of the objects.
2. Zoom in close to the fastener plate that was interactively created between a column and bracing in lesson 3.
You can also create a part basic view when you need to see a specific part clearly. This places the part in the center of the view and fits the work area according to this part. To further improve the view, use the Hide command to hide adjacent parts, such as the two braces on the other side of the column.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Precast Concrete
4
Define Fastener plate custom part
1. Select Detailing > Define custom component… to open the Custom component wizard dialog box. 2. On the Type/Notes tab, set Type to Part, enter a name and description (description is not mandatory) for the custom component as shown. Click Next>.
The Custom component types available: x
Connection: A connection is 2 or more items connected together and is defined as having a main part and 1 or more secondary parts
x
Detail: A detail connects one or more items at the end of, or along the length of, a main part
x
Part: A part is a component in the model such as a ladder or cell form beam
x
Seam: A seam creates seam objects along part or connects two parts along the parts' axial direction.
3. Drag the mouse from left to right as shown below to select the needed fastener plate objects (i.e. plate , studs and welds totally within that rectangular) click Next> on the wizard page 2/3.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Precast Concrete
5
Be careful not to select objects (e.g. parts, fittings, or rebars) that do not belong to this component. Otherwise, when you use the custom component, those objects will also be created.
4. Select two positions: first the plate's lower definition point and then the upper. Click Finish on wizard page 3/3.
The new custom part that you have defined is added to the Custom components dialog box list. You are now able to create this custom part (instead of creating plate, studs and welds separately) in your model by selecting it in the component catalog and creating it by picking two definition points. Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Precast Concrete
6
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Precast Concrete
7
4.2 Define Brace Fastener Plate Custom Connections We will now define the brace connection as a custom connection. We will include the custom part just created to this custom connection. We could also have defined the custom connection straight away from the interactively created objects. Defining a custom connection that includes a custom part enables us later, for example, to change the nested custom part to another one (a different size of fastener plate).
Define Brace(2) custom component
1. Select Detailing > Define custom component… to open the Custom component wizard dialog box. 2. Set Type to Connection, enter a name and description
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Precast Concrete
8
3. On the Position tab set the Position type to Box plane and click Next>. Help: Detailing > Custom components > Custom components reference > Position type
4. Make sure you have Select component select switch pressed down. This enables the selecting of a component (instead of just component objects).
5. Use area select from right to left to select all (and only) the objects belonging to the component (custom part, the fittings and the site welds), click Next > on the wizard page 2/4.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Precast Concrete
9
Site welds and fittings must be visible in the view in order for you to be able to select them. If you are not sure, check the view properties!
Tekla Structures ignores the main part, secondary parts, grids and component symbols when selecting objects to include in the custom component. 6. Select the column as the main part and click Next> on wizard page 3/4. 7. With the Ctrl button pressed down, select the upper brace and the lower brace as secondary parts, click Finish on wizard page 4/4. Tekla Structures displays a connection symbol for the new Custom component. Following the procedure above, we will now define another custom connection at the bottom end of the brace on gridline 2. The only difference now is the name of the connection and that we define only one secondary for the connection. Define Brace(1) custom connection
1. Select Detailing > Define custom component… to open the Custom component wizard dialog box. 2. Set Type to Connection, enter a name and description. Define the position type as box plane.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Precast Concrete
10
3. Use area select to select all the objects belonging to the component (, click Next> on the wizard page 2/4.
4. Select the column as the main part and click Next> on wizard page 3/4. 5. Select the brace as the secondary part and click Finish on wizard page 4/4. Tekla Structures displays a connection symbol for the new Custom component.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Precast Concrete
11
4.3 Use Your New Custom Connections in the Model We will now use the custom components just defined to connect the rest of the braces in the model. Create Brace(2) custom component
1. Open the component catalog.
2. Search with the word fastener.
3. Double-click on the Brace(2) connection to display the properties.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Precast Concrete
12
4. Review the properties and click Apply. Help: Detailing > Custom components > Defining Custom components > Custom components basic properties
5. Pick the column as the main part and the upper and lower brace as the secondary parts and click middle button to create the connection.
The custom component is created. Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Precast Concrete
13
Once the custom component is created it has no intelligence or input values. In practice you can apply the custom component only in framing conditions similar to those for which it was originally created. Test the Change in the column size
We will now check how the Custom component reacts when the situation changes in the model. 1. Change the column size from 380*380 to 600*600, Modify.
Since we selected Box plane as the position type (= where the main part cross section box and the center line of the secondary part intersect), the connection will automatically adjust to the change in the primary profile size. 2. Click the Undo icon to change the beam back to 380*380.
Test the change in the brace sloping angle
3. Change the sloping angle of braces by moving the handles in the other end from the connection in z direction.
Since the fittings are created according to the main part, the cuts of the brace ends will be correct despite the change of the sloping angle.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Precast Concrete
14
4. Undo the changes of the brace sloping angles. Create Brace (1) custom components
1.
Click Brace(1) connection in the component catalog.
2. Create connections to the remaining column brace situations in the model.
You can either create separate custom components for each different case needed in the model or you can parameterize the custom component (see the next section).
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Precast Concrete
15
4.4 Define User_Hole_Creation Custom Detail We will now create a custom detail that cuts a hole through a hollow-core slab.
Create a part cut through a hollow-core slab First we will create a part cut through a hollow-core slab by using a column to define the shape of the cut. Create cutting part
1.
Select the hollow-core slab on level +3850 closest to grid 7-B and create a part basic view of it: right-click and select Create view > Part basic view.
2. To create square part cut of size 380*380 mm: x
Double-click on the Create concrete column icon and define column size and position.
x
Close the dialog with OK.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Precast Concrete
16
x
If necessary, restart the column command and then pick the middle point at the outer end of the hollow-core slab while holding Ctrl button down (this is a reference point for column position).
x
Release the Ctrl button, and type -1000,0,0 press Enter to create the column 1000 mm from the edge.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Precast Concrete
17
Cut part
Cut the hollow-core slab using part cut: 3. Pick the Create part cut icon.
4. Pick the hollow-core slab. 5. Pick the column. 6. To end the command right-click and select Interrupt. 7. Remove the cutting part.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Precast Concrete
18
Define a custom detail Next we will create a detail type custom component. Define custom component
1. Select Detailing > Define custom component… to open the Custom component wizard dialog box. 2. On the Type/Notes tab, set the Type to Detail, enter a Name and a Description (description is not mandatory) for the custom component as shown below.
3. Select the objects (cut + hollow-core slab using the Ctrl key) and press Next >. 4. Pick the main part (hollow-core slab) and press Next >. 5. Select middle point at the outer end of the hollow-core slab to set the position. 6. Click Finish.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Precast Concrete
19
4.5 Parameterize User_Hole_Creation Custom Detail The User_Hole_Creation custom detail is defined as a custom component but as yet has no intelligence or input values. In order to add these capabilities we have to edit the custom component. We will not create a complete parametric custom component here, but we will give you an idea how to build some simple dependencies between component objects and the model. We will create the following variables to automatically adjust to suit a change in hole position, size and shape and we will also input them in the finished connection interface: x
The hole position in x direction
x
The hole position in y direction
x
The hole size and shape
Open Custom Component Editor Edit custom component
1.
Select the User_Hole_Creation custom detail symbol.
2. Right-click and select Edit custom component. A new toolbar named Custom component editor opens along with the Model browser and four basic views of the custom component.
Define parameters Hole size and shape
1.
Open variables dialog by clicking on the Display variables icon.
2. Add a new variable by pressing the Add button. 3. Define the Value type as Profile. 4. Set the Formula to 380*380. 5. In the Label in dialog box field, enter Hole shape.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Precast Concrete
20
6. Select Part cut from the Custom component browser. 7. Under General properties, select Profile of the part cut. 8. Right-click Profile and select Add equation to edit the name. 9. Type Profile=P1 (variable name).
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Precast Concrete
21
Bind hole definition points
We will define the hole position by binding the part cut's reference points. 1.
Select the part cut in any of the views.
2. Select the upper reference point. 3. Right-click and select Bind to plane command.
4. Select Component planes from Custom component editor toolbar's drop down menu.
5. Zoom in to the detail symbol. 6. Rotate to highlight the XY plane. 7. Pick the detail's XY plane.
8. Rotate to highlight the YZ plane. 9. Pick the YZ plane. Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Precast Concrete
22
10. Select Boundary planes from Custom component editor toolbar's drop down menu. 11. Zoom out and rotate to highlight the top boundary plane of the slab. 12. Pick the top plane.
You have now bound the upper reference point in three directions. The distances are now visible in the Variables dialog. Repeat steps 3 - 12 to the part cut's lower reference point by binding it to XY and YZ directions in the Component plane and to slab bottom plane using Boundary plane. Edit hole definition variables
We will next edit the hole position variables and define their visibility on the detail's dialog. 1.
Open the Variables dialog.
2. Edit D1 variable: Label: Distance from middle. 3. Edit D2 variable: Label: Distance from definition point. 4. Edit D3 variable: Formula: 100, Visibility: Hide. 5. Edit D4 variable: Formula: =D1, Visibility: Hide. 6. Edit D5 variable: Formula: =D2, Visibility: Hide. Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Precast Concrete
23
7. Edit D6 variable: Formula: 100, Visibility: Hide. 8. Close editor, save changes.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Precast Concrete
24
Check the results We will now check that the dialog custom detail dialog has the fields that we needed and that they function correctly. Modify custom detail
1.
Double-click on the User_Hole_Creation custom detail symbol. A dialog opens.
2. Change cut size and location, press Modify.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Precast Concrete
25
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Precast Concrete
26
Custom Components for Steel
Tekla Structures 12.0 Basic Training September 21, 2006 Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
Contents
Contents..................................................................................................................................i
4
Custom Components for Steel ...................................................................................3 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5
Define User_end_plate Custom Component .............................................................................3 Create User_end_plate Custom Component.............................................................................7 Parameterize User_end_plate Custom Connection.................................................................10 Define User_Hole_Creation Custom Detail .............................................................................19 Parameterize User_Hole_Creation Custom Detail ..................................................................23
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Contents
i
4
In this lesson
Custom Components for Steel
This lesson introduces custom components and details. You will learn how to: x
Define custom components
x
Use custom components
x
Edit custom components to make them adaptive and parametric
4.1 Define User_end_plate Custom Component You can build custom components either by exploding and modifying an existing component, or by creating the component objects individually as we did in lesson 2. You then define a custom component by picking the objects to include in the custom component, and specifying the information the user needs to input, for example, main part, secondary parts, or points they need to pick. You can then apply the custom component to similar framing conditions in the model. We will now create a custom component from the column-beam connection, which was interactively created in Lesson 3. By changing the connection to a custom component you can use it in other parts of the model and in other models.
Zoom in close to the component, which was interactively created between a column and a beam in lesson 3. Make sure that all of the object types are visible in the view (welds, cuts, fittings, bolts, etc).
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Steel
3
Define Custom component
1.
Select Detailing > Define custom component… to open the Custom component wizard dialog box.
2.
On the Type/Notes tab, set Type to Connection, enter a name and description (description is not mandatory) for the custom component as shown.
The Custom component types available: x
Component: A Component is 2 or more items connected together and is defined as having a main part and 1 or more secondary parts
x
Detail: A Detail connects one or more items at the end of, or along the length of, a main part
x
Part: A Part is a component in the model such as a ladder or cell form beam
x
Seam: A seam creates seam objects and connects parts along a line picked
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Steel
4
with two points.
3.
On the Position tab set the Position type to Box plane and click Next>.
Help: Detailing > Custom components > Custom components reference > Position type
4.
Use area select to select all the objects belonging to the component, click Next> on the wizard page 2/4.
Be careful that you do not select objects (e.g. parts, bolts, welds or cuts) not belonging to this component. Otherwise when you use the custom component those objects will also be created. Tekla Structures ignores the main part, secondary parts, grids and component symbols when you are selecting objects to include in the Custom component.
5.
Select the column as the main part and click Next> on wizard page 3/4.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Steel
5
6.
Select the beam as the secondary part and click Finish on wizard page 4/4.
Tekla Structures displays a connection symbol for the new Custom component.
The new custom component that you have defined is added to Custom components dialog box list.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Steel
6
4.2 Create User_end_plate Custom Component We will now use the custom component that you just defined to create a connection at the other end of the beam. Create custom component
1.
Delete the End plate 144 connection from the other end of the beam.
2.
Open the component catalog.
3.
Select the User_end_plate component on the list.
4.
Right-click and select Properties...
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Steel
7
5.
Review the properties and click Apply. Help: Detailing > Custom components > Defining Custom components > Custom components basic properties
6.
Pick the column as the main part and the beam as the secondary part.
The custom component is created. Change the beam size
We will now check how the Custom component reacts when the situation changes. 1.
Change the beam size from IPE600 to IPE750*137, Modify.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Steel
8
Once the custom component is created it has no intelligence or input values. In practice you can apply the custom component only in similar framing conditions to that which it was originally created.
2.
Click the Undo icon to change the beam back to IPE600.
You can either create separate custom components for each different case needed in the model or you can parameterize the custom component (see the next section).
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Steel
9
4.3 Parameterize User_end_plate Custom Connection The User_end_plate connection is defined as a custom component but as yet has no intelligence or input values. In order to add these capabilities we have to edit the custom component. We will not create a complete parametric custom component in this lesson, but we will give you an idea how to build some simple dependencies between the component objects and the model. We will create variables that will automatically adjust to suit a change in the beam profile and we will also input them in the finished connection interface: x
The end plate top and bottom position (which also defines the plate length)
x
The distance from the first bolt to the beam top flange
We will then create the following variables to automatically adjust to suit a change in the beam profile: x
Column plate top position
x
Part cut top position
Open Custom Component Editor Since we have a custom component in the model we can open the Custom component editor. Edit custom component
1.
Select the User_end_plate component symbol.
2.
Right-click and select Edit custom component.
The Custom component editor opens along with the Custom component editor toolbar, the Custom component browser and four views of the custom component. Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Steel
10
In the Custom component editor, you can create your own components and details and define their properties. You can build in dependencies between objects to make custom components parametric and have them adapt to changes in the model.
Define end plate top and bottom positions Our end plate is modeled with the beam command using plate profile PL20*230. This means the thickness (20) and the width (230) of the plate are defined by the profile. To change the thickness or the width of the plate we will need to parameterize the profile. The length is defined by the start and end points picked for the "beam"(plate). We will now create dependencies between the end points and secondary beam top and bottom flanges.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Steel
11
Tie end plate top to secondary beam top
1.
Select the end plate.
2.
Select the upper handle of the end plate.
3.
Right-click and select Bind to plane.
By moving the cursor around you can now highlight the available planes. 4.
Highlight the plane on the secondary beam top flange, and select it by clicking the mouse.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Steel
12
The appropriate dimension in the model will appear on the screen.
Tie end plate bottom to secondary beam bottom
By following the same procedure tie the end plate lower handle to secondary beam bottom plane. 1.
Select the end plate.
2.
Select the lower handle of the end plate.
3.
Right-click and select Bind to plane.
4.
Highlight the plane on the secondary beam bottom flange, and select it by clicking the mouse.
The appropriate dimension in the model should then appear on the screen.
Define distance from beam top flange to the first bolt We will now add a variable to control the distance from the top of the beam to the first bolt. Remove the bolt offset
To make it simpler to use the new variable, we will first remove the original offset from the bolt. This way the value added in the dialog will be the distance from the top of the beam to the first bolt. 1.
Double-click on the bolt group to open the Bolt properties dialog box.
2.
Change the Start point offset Dx to 0, click Modify.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Steel
13
Tie 1st bolt to secondary beam top
1.
Select the bolt group.
2.
Select the upper handle of the bolt group.
3.
Right-click and select Bind to plane.
4.
Highlight the plane on the secondary beam top flange, and select it by clicking the mouse.
The appropriate dimension in the model appears on the screen. Display and test the variables
1.
Click the Display variables icon to see all distance and parameter variables in a component.
The Variables dialog box appears: Help: Detailing > Custom components > Custom components reference > Variables 2.
Change the value of the lowest variable (the bolt distance), from 10 to 60 and press Enter.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Steel
14
Set the variable labels in dialog
3.
To show the variables in the custom component dialog box set the variable visibility to Show.
4.
Change the field names in the custom component dialog box by naming the variable labels as shown below.
Tie column plate and cut part top to beam top flange Next we will tie the top of the column connection plate and the top of the part cut to the top flange of the beam. The column end plate (as well as the part cut) was modeled as a contour plate. Unlike beam, a contour plate does not have handles that we can bind. Instead, we can create distance variables from the contour plate chamfers to a plane. Instead of binding the chamfers one by one to a plane we will create a magnetic custom plane on the top face of the contour plate. We will then bind this magnetic plane to the beam top flange. The top face of the contour plate will then move with the magnetic plane. Help: Detailing > Custom components > Custom components reference > User defined planes Create user defined planes
1.
Click the Create construction plane icon.
2.
Pick three corner points of the top of the column plate.
3.
Click middle button and the plane is created.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Steel
15
While still in the command:
Edit custom planes to be magnetic
4.
Pick three corners points at the top of the plate part cut.
5.
Click the middle button and the plane is created.
1.
Double-click one of the user planes that you just created to open the Construction plane properties dialog. You must have the plane Select planes switch active:
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Steel
16
Bind magnetic planes to beam top
2.
Tick the Magnetic switch on and click Modify.
3.
Select the magnetic custom plane.
4.
Right-click and select Bind to plane.
5.
Pick the highlighted plane on the top of the secondary beam.
6.
Repeat for the other plane.
7.
Close the editor by clicking the Close editor icon.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Steel
17
In a case where we would like to keep the existing Custom component in our model we could choose to save the custom component with a new name. Change the beam size
Change the beam size from IPE600 to IPE750*137, Modify.
Test the variables
In the custom component dialog change each of the variables and Modify to test their function.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Steel
18
4.4 Define User_Hole_Creation Custom Detail We will now create a custom detail that cuts a hole through a hollow-core slab.
Create a part cut through a hollow-core slab First we will create a part cut through a hollow-core slab by using a column to define the shape of the cut. Create cutting part
1.
Select the hollow-core slab on level +3850 closest to grid 7-B and create a part basic view of it: right-click and select Create view > Part basic view.
2.
To create square part cut of size 380*380 mm: x
Double-click on the Create concrete column icon and define column size and position.
x
Close the dialog with OK.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Steel
19
x
If necessary, restart the column command and then pick the middle point at the outer end of the hollow-core slab while holding Ctrl button down (this is a reference point for column position).
x
Release the Ctrl button, and type r to open Enter numeric location dialog.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Steel
20
x
Cut part
Type @-1000,0,0 and press Enter to create the column 1000 mm from the edge.
Cut the hollow-core slab using part cut: 1.
Pick the Create part cut icon.
2.
Pick the hollow-core slab.
3.
Pick the column.
4.
To end the command right-click and select Interrupt.
5.
Remove the cutting part.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Steel
21
Define a custom detail Next we will create a detail type custom component. Define custom component
1.
Select Detailing > Define custom component… to open the Custom component wizard dialog box.
2.
On the Type/Notes tab, set the Type to Detail, enter a Name and a Description (not mandatory) for the custom component as shown below and click Next >.
3.
Select the objects (cut + hollow-core slab using the Ctrl key) and press Next >.
4.
Pick the main part (hollow-core slab) and press Next >.
5.
Select middle point at the outer end of the hollow-core slab to set the position.
6.
Press Finish.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Steel
22
4.5 Parameterize User_Hole_Creation Custom Detail The User_Hole_Creation custom detail is defined as a custom component but as yet has no intelligence or input values. In order to add these capabilities we have to edit the custom component. We will not create a complete parametric custom component here, but we will give you an idea how to build some simple dependencies between component objects and the model. We will create the following variables to automatically adjust to suit a change in hole position, size and shape and we will also input them in the finished connection interface: x
The hole position in x direction
x
The hole position in y direction
x
The hole size and shape
Open Custom Component Editor Edit custom component
1.
Select the User_Hole_Creation custom detail symbol.
2.
Right-click and select Edit custom component. A new toolbar named Custom component editor opens along with the Custom component browser and 4 basic views of the custom component.
Define parameters Hole size and shape
1.
Open variables dialog by pushing the Display variables icon.
2.
Add new variable by pressing the Add button.
3.
Define the Value type as Profile.
4.
Set the Formula to 380*380.
5.
In the Label in dialog box field enter Hole shape.
6.
Select Part cut from the Custom component browser.
7.
Under General properties, select Profile of the part cut. Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Steel
23
8.
Bind hole definition points
Type Profile=P1 (variable name).
We will define the hole position by binding the part cut's reference points. 1.
Select the part cut in any of the views.
2.
Select the upper reference point.
3.
Right-click and select Bind to plane command.
4.
Select Component planes from Custom component editor toolbar's drop down menu.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Steel
24
5.
Zoom in to the detail symbol.
6.
Rotate to highlight the XY plane.
7.
Pick the detail's XY plane.
8.
Rotate to highlight the YZ plane.
9.
Pick the YZ plane.
10. Select Boundary planes from Custom component editor toolbar's drop down menu. 11. Zoom out and rotate to highlight the top boundary plane of the slab. 12. Pick the top plane.
You have now bound the upper reference point in three directions. The distances are now visible in Variables dialog. Repeat steps 3 - 12 to the part cut's lower reference point by binding it to XY and YZ directions in the Component plane and to slab bottom plane using Boundary plane. Edit hole definition variables
We will next edit the hole position variables and define their visibility on the detail's dialog. 1.
Open the Variables dialog.
2.
Edit D1 variable: Label: Distance from middle.
3.
Edit D2 variable: Label: Distance from definition point.
4.
Edit D3 variable: Formula: 100, Visibility: Hide.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Steel
25
5.
Edit D4 variable: Formula: =D1, Visibility: Hide.
6.
Edit D5 variable: Formula: =D2, Visibility: Hide.
7.
Edit D6 variable: Formula: 100, Visibility: Hide.
8.
Close editor, save changes.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Steel
26
Check the results We will now check that the dialog custom detail dialog has the fields that we needed and that they function correctly. Modify custom detail
1.
Double-click on the User_Hole_Creation custom detail symbol. A dialog opens.
2.
Change cut size and location, press Modify.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Steel
27
Basic Modeling 2
Tekla Structures 12.0 Basic Training September 20, 2006 Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
Contents
Contents..................................................................................................................................i
5
Basic Modeling 2.........................................................................................................3 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6
Start a New Model - BasicModel2 .............................................................................................4 Setting Up Job Specific Information...........................................................................................7 Create Concrete Members ......................................................................................................11 Create Steel Members.............................................................................................................23 Combine Models 1 and 2.........................................................................................................41 Define Your Own Select Filters................................................................................................45
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Contents
i
5
In this lesson
Basic Modeling 2
In this lesson we will cover some preliminary tasks that you need to do before starting to model in a real project. We will create a new model and recap the basic functions introduced in lesson 1. After that, you will learn some more about the basic functions. You will learn how to: x
Set up project information
x
Define part properties and numbering series
x
Work in true planes (sloped, skewed)
x
Use phases
x
Combine separate models
x
Create your own select filters
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2
3
5.1 Start a New Model - BasicModel2 Start a new model and name it BasicModel2.
Create new model Start a new model
1.
Pick the New icon.
2.
Save in C:\TeklaStructuresModels, type Model name "BasicModel2".
3.
Click the OK button and the model will be created.
Create grid We will now create a grid for the model. In order to combine Basic Model 1 and Basic Model 2 later, we will take into account the positioning of Basic Model 1 and define the origin of Basic Model 2 grid to be 0,13900,0 in the global coordinates. The grid is created according to the work plane, the current local coordinate system, of the model. So before creating the grid we will temporarily position the work plane to the global coordinates 0,13900,0.
The red coordinate arrow symbol indicates the work plane, which is the current local coordinate system of the model. Most of the commands dependent on the coordinate system use work plane coordinates.
You can create a skew grid by first setting the work plane to the desired skew position.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2
4
Set Work plane to a new position
1.
On the menu, select View > Work plane > With one point.
2.
Type 0,13900, click Enter or OK.
The work plane is positioned in global 0,13900,0
You can also create a grid and then move the grid with the Move command.
You can use the command Work plane > With one point to set the work plane exactly to the desired position. This command keeps the work plane parallel to the current work plane, but moves it to a new position using a single picked point.
Create the grid
Fit work area
1.
Delete the default grid (if there exists one).
2.
Double-click on the Create grid line icon.
3.
Edit the grid, in the Grid properties dialog box, according to the grids shown in the figure above (coordinates and text).
4.
Click Create.
5.
Enter GRID2 in the Save as field and click the Save as button to save the grid values.
1.
Click anywhere in the view.
2.
Right-click and select Fit work area.
The view should now look like the one below.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2
5
Create plane views along gridlines We will now create Elevation and Plan views along the gridlines. Create grid views
1.
Select the grid.
2.
Right-click and select Create view > Grid views from the pop-up menu.
3.
Click the Show… button on each view plane to open the View properties dialog box, set the view properties the way you want and click OK.
4.
Click Create in the Creation of views along grid lines dialog box.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2
6
5.2 Setting Up Job Specific Information Prior to adding any parts we will setup the model with the necessary job specific information: x
Project properties
x
Preferences
x
Part properties and numbering series
Project properties Project properties are common to all drawings and can be used to fill in typical information in the title blocks. Set up project properties
1.
Open the Project properties dialog box by selecting Properties-> Project…
2.
Fill in the information as shown in the dialog box below.
3.
Press OK.
Check preferences Before starting the modeling we will check that preferences are set up correctly. Help: System > Using Tekla Structures effectively > General > Preferences Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2
7
Check that your preferences are set up correctly before you start modeling. If you change settings on the Preferences tab, Tekla Structures only applies the new settings to connections you subsequently create. Connections you created prior to changing the preferences are not affected.
Check preferences
1.
Open Setup > Options…
2.
On the Preferences tab check the values are as below, click OK.
Part properties and numbering series You use a numbering series (numbering prefixes and start numbers) to divide parts, assemblies (steel detailing) and cast units (concrete detailing) into groups. For example, you can allocate separate numbering series to different phases or part types. You can name the numbering series to which a part, assembly or cast unit belongs, by using the part properties dialog box. The numbering series name consists of a prefix and a starting number. If you already know in the beginning of the project how the members should be numbered it is a good idea to create the parts right from the start with the correct numbering series. Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2
8
Help: Modeling > Parts > Numbering parts > Defining numbers to be used for parts In a later lesson you will learn the basics of numbering parts in Tekla Structures; how numbering series result in different part / assembly /cast unit numbers, numbering settings etc. Set the part properties
Go through each of the part properties dialog box (Beam properties, Column properties, Contour plate properties, etc.) and set them up with the information shown in the tables below and save each of them with a specific name. See the Adjust Beam properties example below the tables.
Steel members Parts/ command
Part prefix
Part start no.
Assembly prefix
Assembly start no.
Part name
Material
Class
Beams
PB
1
AB
1
BEAM
S355JR
6
Vertical braces
PV
1
AV
1
BRACING_V
S355JR
3
Horizontal braces
PH
1
AH
1
BRACING_H
S355JR
3
Rafters
PR
1
AR
1
RAFTER
S355JR
9
Purlins
PP
1
AP
1
PURLIN
S355JR
8
Columns
PC
1
AC
1
COLUMN
S355JR
7
Silos
PX
1
AX
1
SILO
S355JR
1
1001
A
1
PLATE
S355JR
99
Beam command:
Column command:
Contour plate command: Plates
Concrete members Parts/ command
Cast unit prefix
Cast unit start no.
Part name
Material
Class
Concrete beam command: Beams
CB
1
BEAM
K40-1
6
Hollow-core slabs
CH
1
HCSLAB
K40-1
1
CC
1
COLUMN
K40-1
3
CP
1
FOOTING
K40-1
2
Concrete column command: Columns Pad footing command: Pad footings Concrete slab Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2
9
command: Slabs Example: Adjust beam properties
CS
1
SLAB
1.
Open the Beam properties dialog.
2.
Match the highlighted fields in the dialog box below.
K40-1
4
Type the part name BEAM in the save as field and click the Save as button.
Save defaults After you have set up the properties, you must save the Project properties and Preferences for this model with the Save defaults command. The Save defaults command creates a set of standard files which also include the part properties files. These standard properties are loaded when you open the model. In other words, when you want specific properties to be loaded by default when you open a model, set up and load the properties before using the Save defaults command. Help: System > Files and Folders > Customizing Tekla Structures > Save defaults Save Defaults
Click Setup > Save defaults.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2
10
5.3 Create Concrete Members First we will create pad footings and columns on gridline 1 and then copy them to the other gridlines. We will then create beams on gridlines 1 and 3 and mirror them to the other side of the structure. With a slab generation macro, we will then create TT slabs on top of the beams at level 7175. Finally we will create a sloped grouting on top of the TT slabs.
Pre-cast footings We will now create foundations on gridline 1.
2700*2700 footing
1.
Double-click on the Create pad footing icon.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2
11
2100*2100 footing
2.
Load the saved FOOTING properties.
3.
Enter the pad footing information in the dialog box for a 2700*2700 footing as shown in the drawing.
4.
Click Apply.
5.
Pick grid intersections C-1 and F-1.
While still in the command: 6.
Enter the pad footing information in the dialog box for a 2100*2100 footing as shown in the drawing.
7.
Click Apply.
8.
Pick grid intersections D-1 and E-1.
The footings should now look like those shown below:
Pre-cast columns Now we will create the columns on gridline 1.
900*600 columns
600*600 columns
1.
Double-click on the Create Concrete column icon.
2.
Load the COLUMN properties that you saved earlier.
3.
According to the drawing shown above, enter the information in the Concrete column properties dialog box for a 900*600 column, and click Apply.
4.
Pick the intersections of grids C-1 and then F-1.While still in the command:
Complete the dialog for 600*600 columns and create them on grid intersections D-1 and E-1.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2
12
Copy the members We will now copy the footings and columns to other gridlines. Copy the members on gridlines C and F
Copy the members on gridlines D and E
1.
Select the footings and columns on gridlines C and F.
2.
Right-click and select Copy > Translate… on the pop-up menu.
3.
Pick two points to show the translation vector (6000 in x direction).
4.
Type in the number of copies (6).
5.
Click Copy.
1.
Select the footings and columns on gridlines D and E.
2.
Right-click and select Copy > Translate… on the pop-up menu.
3.
Pick two points to show the translation vector (12000 in x direction).
4.
Type in the number of copies (3).
5.
Click Copy.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2
13
Pre-cast ledger beams We will now create the beams on gridlines 1 and 3 at level +7175.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2
14
Create beams on gridlines 1 and 3
1.
Double-click on the Create concrete beam icon.
2.
Load the BEAM properties that you’ve saved.
3.
Enter the information in the Concrete beam properties dialog box for gridline 1 beams according to the drawing above, click Apply.
4.
In the 3D view pick the reference point of the column at C-7175 .
5.
Still having the cursor snapping to the picked point, type z to lock the z coordinate and then pick the top point of the column at D-7175.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2
15
6.
End the command by clicking the middle mouse button.
7.
Still having the z coordinate locked, create the other two beams on gridline 1 in the same way.
8.
Enter the information for the beams on gridline 3 in the Concrete beam properties dialog box, click Apply.
9.
Create the gridline 3 beams.
10. Type z to unlock the z coordinate The model should now look as shown below.
Mirror the beams to gridlines 5 and 7
1.
Select the beams just created on gridlines 1 and 3.
2.
Copy special > Mirror the beams to the other end of the structure indicating two points on gridline 4 as the mirror line.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2
16
The model now looks as shown below.
Pre-cast TT slabs We will now create precast TT slabs on top of the framework by using the Modeling of Slab Area macro (88). Create the TT slabs
3.
Find the Modeling of Slab Area macro (88) in the Component catalog.
4.
Double-click on the component to open the component dialog box.
5.
Complete the dialog box as shown and Apply.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2
17
6.
In the PLAN +7175 view, pick positions 1 and 2 (the intersections of gridlines and the column edges) as shown, click the middle mouse button.
7.
Pick positions 3 and 4 as shown, click the middle mouse button.
8.
Pick positions 5 and 6, click the middle mouse button.
9.
Then, pick position 4.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2
18
The slabs are created.
10. Select the macro symbol and copy it to the other spans.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2
19
Second stage concrete / grouting We will create grouting out of four symmetrical slabs. First, we create one slab, edit the sloping for the slab, and then copy-mirror the rest of the slabs.
Create the grouting
1.
Double-click on the Create concrete slab icon.
2.
Load the SLAB properties that you saved earlier.
3.
Set the profile to 50 and the position in depth to Front and Apply.
4.
In the PLAN +7175 view, pick the four corners for the slab as shown. (1) Outer corner of the column (2) Intersection of the gridline and the column edge (3) Mid point of the gridline (4) Outer edge of the beam (Perpendicular snap)
5.
Click the middle mouse button to create the slab.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2
20
We will next set the sloping for the grouting by editing the dz values of the three chamfers shown below.
Create the rest of the slabs
1.
Create the rest of the slabs (with Copy-Translate).
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2
21
Set the sloping for the grouting
2.
Double-click on the chamfer.
3.
Set the Dz1 value to 150, Modify.
4.
Repeat this for the other two chamfers.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2
22
5.4 Create Steel Members First, we will create two columns on gridline 1 and then a rafter between them. After that we will create the construction points needed to create the horizontal bracing and purlins. We will copy-translate the completed portal frame and points. We will then replace the concrete columns on gridlines 2, 4 and 6, combining them with the upper steel columns so that they are turned into full-length steel columns. Utilizing a sloping work plane and view planes, we will model the horizontal bracing and purlins. Finally, we will create vertical bracing on gridlines C and F.
Steel columns We first create two columns on gridline 1.
Create columns
1.
Double-click on the Create column icon.
2.
Load the COLUMN properties.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2
23
3.
Complete the Column properties (profile and levels) for the column at grid intersection C-1 as shown in the figure above and click Apply.
4.
Pick grid intersection C-1 to create the column.
5.
Complete the Column properties for the column at grid F-1, and click Apply.
6.
Pick the grid intersection F-1 to create the second column.
Since the profile depth of the concrete and steel columns are different (900*600 => h=900 while HEA 800 => h=790), middle positioning causes a gap in the outer face.
Use the Measure tool to measure the distance from the edge of the column to the edge of the slab.
Measure the gap
1.
Click on the Create y measure icon.
2.
In the GRID 1 view pick the point in the slab corner, then the point in the column corner.
3.
Pick a position to place the dimension.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2
24
The measure tools measure distances between two points in the view plane. Measures are visible in the rendered view window until you update or redraw the window.
Adjust the vertical position
Adjust the column edge to the slab (and concrete column) by using the vertical position offset in the Column properties dialog. 1.
Open the Column properties dialog box.
2.
Modify the column on gridline C using a vertical offset of -55.
3.
Modify the column on gridline F using a vertical offset of 55.
Steel rafter Now we will create a rafter between the two columns that we just created.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2
25
Create rafter
1.
Double-click on the Create beam icon.
2.
Load the RAFTER properties.
3.
Enter the rafter information in the dialog according to the drawing above (Profile: IPE750*160) and click Apply.
4.
In the GRID 1 view pick grid C-20200 and then F-18200.
Work points for horizontal bracing and purlins After inputting the two columns and the rafter, we will layout points for modeling the purlins, and the vertical and horizontal braces.
Bracing work points First, we need to create points at the intersection of grid C and the rafter centerline and the intersection of grid F and the rafter centerline. Then, using those points, we will create work points for the braces. To create a point at the intersection (indicated with a red arrow) of grid C and the rafter centerline:
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2
26
Intersection of grid and rafter centerline
Copy the point to the other side
1.
Double-click on the Create divided line points icon.
2.
Type 1 (1 point) and pick the positions shown below.
To create the point in the intersection of grid F and the rafter centerline on the other end of the rafter, we simply copy the first point. 1.
Select the point just created, right-click and select Copy – Translate…
2.
Pick the start point of the rafter, then the end point of the rafter, then click Copy.
We will now create the work points for the first and the last brace. First and last brace work points
1.
Double-click on the Create extension point icon.
2.
Type -800, click OK.
3.
Pick one of the points just created, and then the other.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2
27
4.
Repeat, picking the points in the reverse order.
Using the Create divided line points command to divide the space between the work points that you just created into ten equal spaces (9 points). Divide the working points in ten segments
1.
Double-click on the Create divided line points icon.
2.
Enter 9 as the number of dividing points, click OK.
3.
Pick one of the work points that you just created, and then the other.
Purlins work points We can now use the grid intersections C-20200 and F-18200 to create the work points for the first and last purlins. First and last purlins work points
Divide the working points in 12 segments
1.
Double-click on the Create extension point icon.
2.
Type -600, click OK.
3.
Pick grid intersection C-20200, and then F-18200.
4.
Repeat, picking the points in the reverse order.
Using the Create divided line points command, divide the space between the work points that you just created into 12 equal spaces (11 points).
Copy the portal frame and the points We will now copy the columns, the rafter and the points to gridlines 2-7.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2
28
Copy the members
1.
Select the columns, the rafter and the points.
2.
Right-click and select Copy > Translate.
3.
Pick two points to show the translation vector (6000 in x direction).
4.
Type the number of copies (6).
5.
Click Copy.
Combine columns We modeled concrete columns also on gridlines 2, 4 and 6 even though they are not needed to support the concrete beams. We will now replace them with full length steel columns by combining them with the steel columns on top of them. Combine columns
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2
29
1.
Select Edit > Combine from the menu.
2.
Pick the steel column at grid C-2.
3.
Pick the concrete column at grid C-2.
4.
Reply OK to both questions.
The columns are now combined. The combined column has inherited the properties of the steel column (the first picked part).
5.
Repeat the combining for the rest of the columns on gridlines 2, 4 and 6.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2
30
1.
Set sloping work plane for bracing and purlins The next step is to model the horizontal bracing and purlins of the sloped roof. To place the parts in the correct plane we will first change the work plane (which currently is the local coordinate system of the model) to the roof slope. Help: Modeling > Getting Started > Basics > Defining the work area and shifting the work plane Help: Modeling > Getting Started > View reference > View >Work plane>To part plane Set work plane to the roof slope
To set the work plane to the roof slope: 1.
Pick the Set Work plane to part top icon.
2.
Pick the rafter on gridline 1.
The work plane is now positioned in a plane parallel to the top plane of the rafter.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2
31
The Set work plane to part plane command sets the work plane parallel to the part plane (front, top, back, bottom) on the center line of the part.
You can use the command Work plane > With one point to set the work plane exactly to the desired position. This command keeps the work plane parallel to the current work plane, but moves it to a new position using a single picked point.
True plan view To make it easier to add the roof bracing we will now make a true plan view of the roof bracing by creating a view perpendicular to the work plane. We can also use the true plan view in drawings. Working in a true plan view makes it easier to model e.g. sloped objects since the grids are also shown in the true plan and points in the view plane are presented as yellow crosses. The part positioning, copying, etc, however, always comply with the work plane coordinate system no matter in which view you perform the commands.
Create true plan view
1.
Pick Properties > View...
2.
Complete the properties as shown below, click OK.
3.
Select View > Create view > To workplane.
The new view is created. The work points created for braces appear in yellow since they are now on the view plane. The grid is also shown in the true plan view plane.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2
32
Create horizontal bracing Working in the true plan view, we will next create the horizontal bracing members using the Create beam tool. Create horizontal bracing
1.
Double-click on the Create beam icon.
2.
Load the BRACING_H properties.
Complete the dialog box according to the information shown in the drawing above and change the Position at depth to: Middle and Apply. 3.
In the true plan view create the braces shown in the drawing by snapping to the yellow points.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2
33
Check the positioning
Check the position of the braces in the 3D view and elevation view on grid 1.
We will now copy-mirror the braces to the other end of the building (between gridlines 4 and 5). Since the work plane is now at the same slope with the TRUE PLAN view, it is easy to pick the points for the mirror line. The Copy special > Mirror command copies and mirrors objects through a plane that is perpendicular to the work plane and passes through a line you specify.
Mirror the braces
1.
Select the braces.
2.
Copy special > Mirror.
3.
In the True plan view pick two points on gridline 4 to set the mirror line and click Copy.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2
34
Create purlins While still working in the true plan view we will create the purlins by using the Create beam tool. Create purlins
1.
Double-click on the Create beam icon.
2.
Load the PURLIN properties.
3.
Select a 3Z00 /3.0 profile for the purlin.
4.
Change the Position / At depth to: Front with 5 mm offset and Apply.
5.
Pick the purlin work point near grid intersection F-1 at the command Pick first position.
The point that you pick for the purlin is red since it is not in the view plane. 6.
At the command: Pick second point, pick the work point near grid intersection F-2.
7.
Check the elevation view on grid 1 to ensure that the purlin is orientated and positioned correctly.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2
35
With asymmetric profiles (Z, L, etc) the picking order of the first and second position determines the orientation. It is not possible to change the orientation using the beam properties.
8. Set the work plane back to global origin
Create the rest of the purlins by using the Copy > Translate command.
Now we must switch the work plane back to the global origin to carry on modeling outside of the roof plane. 1.
Select View > Work plane > Work plane…
2.
Select Plane: XY and set the depth coordinate to 0 and click Change.
The work plane is now set back to the global origin.
Vertical bracing Working in the elevation on the GRID C view we will create vertical bracing using the Create beam tool. Create brace
1.
Double-click on the Create beam icon.
2.
Load the BRACING_V properties.
3.
Enter RHS200*120*8 as the profile.
4.
Change the Position / At depth to: Front and add a 5 mm offset, click Apply.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2
36
5.
Create one brace using the column top positions at C-1 and C-2.
6.
Move the brace 1300 mm downwards and to the middle of the column.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2
37
Copy the brace along grid C
1.
Select the brace and use Copy special > Translate… to copy the brace five times at 6000 mm intervals along gridline C.
Copy the braces to gridline F
2.
Select all the braces on gridline C and select Copy special > Translate…
3.
In the GRID 1 view, pick the outer corner of the column on gridline C as the first position.
4.
Pick the inner corner of the column on gridline F as the second position, click Copy.
Crane girders Next we will add crane girders to the framing. Create girder
1.
Double-click on the Create beam icon.
2.
Load the BEAM properties.
3.
Enter IPE450 for the profile size.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2
38
Copy girders
4.
In the GRID 1 view, pick the grid intersection C-15500.
5.
Use the cursor to snap (do not pick!)! i n the y direction.
6.
With the keyboard type 930 for the numeric location and press Enter.
1.
Copy the girder that you created to the other columns on gridline C.
2.
Use the Copy – mirror command to copy the girders from gridline C to gridline F.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2
39
The BasicModel2 model is now complete. Save the model
Save the model.
Save the model with a new name
1.
Click File > Save as…
2.
Check the path C:\TeklaStructuresModels, in the Save in field and type Model name BasicModelCombined.
3.
Press the OK button. The model has now been saved with the new name.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2
40
5.5 Combine Models 1 and 2 Next we will combine BasicModel1 and BasicModelCombined by copying the objects in phase 1 from BasicModel1. To copy the objects from another model we will use the command; Copy from model. This command copies objects from specified phase(s) from another model. To be able to manage the objects from the two models after we have combined them we will first transfer the model 2 parts to a different phase. Help: Modeling > Settings and tools > Settings > Phases
Change the phase of BasicModel2 members, preparation Check objects by phases
1.
Click Properties > Phase number... to open the Phase manager dialog box.
By default only Phase 1 appears in the dialog box. 2.
Select Phase 1.
3.
Click Objects by phases.
All the parts in the model become highlighted, indicating that they belong to Phase 1. Add a new phase – Model2
4.
Click on the Add button to add a new phase.
5.
Edit the name of the new phase to Model 2.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2
41
6.
Also edit the name of the Phase 1 to Model 1.
7.
See that all of the parts are still highlighted in the Model 2 phase.
8.
Click Modify phase.
9.
Now all of the parts in the model have changed to Phase number 2.
In BasicModel1 the column footings on gridline B were dimensioned both for steel columns on gridline B and concrete columns on gridline C. After combining the models the footings on gridline C will no longer be needed and you can delete them. Remove pad footings
Delete the pad footings on gridline C.
Edit > Copy from model Since we did not edit the phases in BasicModel1 they all belong to phase number 1. Copy from model
1.
Click Edit > Copy special > From model...
2.
Select BasicModel1 as the model to copy from in the Model directories list.
3.
Enter 1 as the phase number from which to copy the objects.
4.
Click Copy.
The model 1 parts are now in the combined model. Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2
42
With the Copy special > From model command you are not able to import drawings with the model.
Change the Model 1 part properties and numbering series The Model 1 parts were created without paying attention to part properties and they are not consistent with the Model 2 parts (color, name, numbering series, and material). The different numbering series and material would result in otherwise equal parts getting different numbers when numbering. In this combined model we want all of the parts to be numbered according to the numbering series shown in the table in the beginning of the lesson. To achieve this we will need to modify the Model 1 part properties so that they are consistent with the Model 2 parts. The properties of the connection parts to be created in the new model will be consistent with the existing ones since we used the same default Preferences in both models. Change pad footing properties
1.
Select the Model 1 pad footings.
You can try the available select filters for selecting the footings. 2.
Load the FOOTING properties.
3.
Remove the modify switches and check only Name, Material, Class and Numbering series switches.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2
43
4. Change other parts properties
Click Modify.
By following the procedure above change the properties for: x
Beams
x
Concrete beams
x
Columns
x
Concrete columns
x
Slabs
x
Hollow-core slabs
x
Horizontal bracing
x
Vertical bracing
x
Silos.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2
44
5.6 Define Your Own Select Filters To make the selecting of parts easier in the future we will now define select filters for each part type. We will use the names of the part as filtering criteria. For steel/concrete beams and columns we will use the materials as additional filtering criteria to be able to filter them separately. Help: Modeling > Settings and tools > Filter > Select filter Define select filter for footing
1.
Click on the Display select filter dialog icon to open the Select filter dialog box.
2.
Load the standard filter to turn out all the possible filtering.
3.
Enter the name FOOTING in the Name field of the Parts tab.
4.
Enter the name FOOTING in the Save as field and click Save as.
You can now select the new filter on the drop-down list.
By following the procedure above, define select filters for: x
Slabs
x
Hollow-core slabs
x
Horizontal bracing
x
Vertical bracing
x
Silos
x
Rafters Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2
45
x Define select filter for plates
Purlins.
To define select filters for plates created both manually and by the connections: 1.
Enter the name *PLATE* in the Name field of the Parts tab. (*PLATE* matches every part whose name includes the word PLATE)
2. Define select filter for steel beams
Enter the name PLATE in the Save as field and click Save as.
To define select filters for steel beams: 1.
Enter the name BEAM in the Name field of the Parts tab.
2.
Enter S* in the Material field of the Parts tab. (S* matches every material whose material name begins with the character S)
3.
Enter the name BEAM_STEEL in the Save as field and click Save as.
By following the procedure above define select filters for: x
Concrete beams
x
Steel columns
x
Concrete columns.
Create your own select filters to use both for modeling and for automating drawing creation with the help of wizards.
The Copy from model command only copies the objects from another model (not e.g. attributes from the model folder). We will now bring the attributes created in BasicModel 1 to BasicModelCombined. Bring the BasicModel1 attributes
1.
Tools > Open model folder.
2.
Browse to model BasicModel1 > Attributes.
3.
Copy the files.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2
46
Save the model
4.
Browse to BasicModelCombined > Attributes.
5.
Paste.
Finally save the model.
Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2
47
Profiles and Materials
Tekla Structures 11.0 Basic Training March 17, 2005 Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
Contents
6
Profiles and Materials ..................................................................................................3 6.1 6.2 6.3
Create Your Own Parametric Profile .........................................................................................4 Manage Library Profiles...........................................................................................................17 Add a New Material .................................................................................................................21
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Contents
i
6
In this lesson
Profiles and Materials
This lesson explains how to view and modify the catalogs. You will learn how to create a new parametric profile with the sketching tool, how to add a profile to the library profiles and how to group library profiles with rules. After updating the profile catalog we will use the new profile in the model to create the crane beams.
In this lesson you will also learn how to add a new material type and a new grade to the material catalog. We will use this new defined material for the silos in the model. Introduction
Catalogs are databases containing detailed information about profiles, materials and bolts, which are available for use in your project. For example, the bolt catalog contains a library of standard bolts and bolt assemblies used in structural steelwork. Catalogs can also contain project or company-specific information. Catalogs can also be imported and exported. See more in Tekla Structures Help: System > Catalogs > Things you should know See more for profile import and export in Tekla Structures Help: System > Catalogs > The profile catalog > Merging profile catalogs.
See more about material catalogs in Tekla Structures Help: System > Catalogs > The material catalog.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Profiles and Materials
3
6.1 Create Your Own Parametric Profile In this exercise we will define a new cross section to be used for a crane beam. We will create the crane beam as a parametric profile using the Tekla Structures cross section sketch editor.
Sketch a cross section We are going to open the Cross section sketch editor and then sketch a rough outline of the shape shown above. It doesn’t matter if the lines are exactly horizontal or vertical, or if they touch at the ends. Neither the dimensions are important at this stage. We will connect the ends of the poly-line and force the lines to be horizontal or vertical later. Open sketch editor
1. Select Sketch parametric cross section from File > Catalog > Profiles > Sketch parametric cross section to open the sketch editor. The sketch editor opens showing the sketch editor view with toolbar, Variables dialog box and Sketch browser.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Profiles and Materials
4
Sketch a cross section
1. Click on the Sketch polyline icon.
2. Sketch the profile shown below and click the middle mouse button.
The yellow circles represent "chamfers" in the sketch editor.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Profiles and Materials
5
3. Click on the Coincident constraint icon.
4. Pick the ends of the lines one by to connect the ends
Force the lines to horizontal / vertical
1. Click on the Horizontal constraint icon.
2. Select all the lines you want to be horizontal. 3. Click on the Vertical constraint icon.
4. Select all the lines you want to be vertical.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Profiles and Materials
6
Add dimension constraints to the cross section We will now add the needed dimension parameters to the cross section. Some of the dimension parameters in the parametric profile (the red ones in the figure below) will be user definable and some (the black ones) will be tied to the user definable parameters with equations.
Add horizontal dimensions
1. Click on the Sketch horizontal distance icon.
2. Select 2 points (shown in red) and then the dimension line position. A dimension is then added and a variable is added to the variables table.
3. Repeat adding dimensions for the edge fold thicknesses (b2, b3) and the web thickness (b4).
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Profiles and Materials
7
4. In the variables table, change parameter b3 to be = b2. B3 is then automatically hidden.
5. Add a dimension b5 as shown.
Take care not to add too many dimensions to the profile or the constraints will work against each other.
6. In the variables table, change parameter b5 to be9 7.
This will result the upper flange to be horizontally symmetrical
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Profiles and Materials
8
8. Add a dimension to the lower flange width and to the left cantilever.
9. Add the equation =(b6-b4)/2 to the cantilever. This will result in the left and right cantilevers being symmetrical.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Profiles and Materials
9
Add vertical dimensions:
1. Click on the Sketch vertical distance icon.
2. Add a dimension for the profile height.
3. Add dimensions for edge fold heights.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Profiles and Materials
10
4. Add the equation h3 =h2.
5. Add dimensions for the upper flange thicknesses.
6. Add the equation h5 =h4
7. Add dimensions for the lower flange thicknesses.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Profiles and Materials
11
8. Add equation h8=h7 Now the profile is symmetric.
Edit the labels
1. Select Show for Visibility for the variables that can be user defined. Edit the labels of the shown parameters.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Profiles and Materials
12
2. Save the profile.
3. Type the prefix "CRANE" into the User profile cross section dialog box.
4. Click OK. 5. Close the profile.
6. Reply No to the question about saving the sketch. The parametric profile is now ready to be used in the profile catalog.
Modify the parametric profile – edit chamfers We will next complete the cross section shape by modifying two inner corners of the crane beam profile, which require a radius.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Profiles and Materials
13
Reopen the profile for editing
1. Open the component catalog (Ctrl + f) and select the category Sketches or select File > Catalog > Profiles > Modify sketched parametric cross section to access the profile you created in the catalog.
2. Double-click on the sketch CRANE that you just created. Add rounding to the contour plate corners
3. Add chamfers to the profile: double-click on a circle highlighted in red, select curved chamfer type, and enter radius values as shown, Modify. See more about chamfers in Tekla Structures Help: Modeling > Detailing > Detailing commands > Chamfer.
4. Repeat editing the chamfer in the other highlighted corner. 5. Close and save the sketch.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Profiles and Materials
14
6. Click Yes to update the existing profiles in the model.
Test the parametric profile
1. Double-click on the Create beam icon. Tekla Structures opens the Beam properties dialog. 2. Click on the Select… button on the right side of the Profile field. The Select profile dialog opens. 3. Select Parametric profile as the category and User-defined, parametric as the profile type. 4. On the Profile subtype list, select the CRANE profile that you just created. 5. Create a beam to the model and test the profile with different parameters.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Profiles and Materials
15
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Profiles and Materials
16
6.2 Manage Library Profiles Add an instance of a parametric profile to the profile library
In case you often need to use specific size parametric profiles, it might be a good idea to add them as standard (fixed) profiles to the profile catalog. The dimensions of a library profile are fixed and can be changed only in the Modify profile catalog dialog box. This makes it faster and easier to select the necessary profile and also reduces the risk of incorrect user-defined parameters. See more information about the profile catalog in Tekla Structures help System > Catalogs > The profile catalog. Add profile
1. Select File > Catalog > Profiles > Modify… on the menu to open the Modify profile catalog dialog box. 2. Right-click in the tree structure and select Add profile. A new profile will be created with the name PROFILE (number).
Set profile properties
3. Change the profile name to CRANE400. 4. Choose the Profile type, User defined, parametric from pull-down list and the Profile subtype CRANE. 5. Enter dimensions for the profile as shown below.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Profiles and Materials
17
6. Click Update to insert the values to the profile.
You could now easily continue adding crane profiles of any other sizes (Crane 500, Crane 600, etc.) to the library.
7. Click OK to save the values. 8. Click OK to Confirm the save of the profile to the model folder
The profile can now be found among the library profiles and is ready for use.
Add a rule to the profile catalog In the profile catalog, the library profiles are grouped according to rules such as profile type (e.g. I profiles) and profile sub-type (e.g. HEA). We will now add a rule for the CRANE profiles in the profile catalog. See more about rules in Tekla Structures Help: System > Catalogs > The profile catalog > Working with rules. Add a rule
1. Select File > Catalog > Profiles > Modify… on the menu. 2. Right-click on the profile tree dialog and select Add rule.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Profiles and Materials
18
3. Type in the Rule name: CRANE profiles. 4. As the Profile type, to which the rule will be applied, select All profiles. 5. As the Name filter string, type "CRANE*". See more about filters in Tekla Structures System > Catalogs > Things you should know > The filter.
As a default, the wildcard symbol (*) is entered, meaning "all entries". To group all catalog entries with names beginning with A, enter A* as the Name filter string. To group all catalog entries with names containing 100, enter *100*. The characters * and ? can also be used in object names. If the object name you want to filter contains * or ?, enclose * or ?in square brackets. E.g., to find the profile P100*10, enter P100[*1] 0 in the filter field. 6. Click OK to save the rule and close the dialog.
7. Confirm to save the profile to the model folder.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Profiles and Materials
19
Use the profile in the model Create the beams
1. Double-click on the Create beam icon and select the profile CRANE400. 2. Create one crane beam from gridline 1 to 4. Start at the outer edge of the supporting beam on gridline 1, and end at the middle of the supporting beam on gridline 4.
3. Set the position in plane and position in depth fields to position the beam as shown. To get the right offset for the "on plane position", use the measuring tool!
4. Select the crane beam and make a copy of it to go from gridline 4 to gridline 7. 5. Select both crane beams and copy them to the other side of the building on gridline C.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Profiles and Materials
20
We now have crane beams on both sides of the building.
6.3 Add a New Material We will next add a new material to the Material catalog. See more about the material catalog in Tekla Structures help System > Catalogs > The material catalog.
Add a new material type We will first create a new material type under which the new material will be created. Open the material catalog
Select File > Catalog > Materials > Modify… on the menu to open the Modify material catalog dialog.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Profiles and Materials
21
Create a new material type
If the material type you need is missing from the tree, you can create a new one. 1. Right-click on a material branch in the tree and select Add miscellaneous branch.
Add a new material We will next add a zero-weight material under the miscellaneous branch and use it for the silos in the model. Create a new material grade
2. Right-click on the Miscellaneous branch in the tree and select Add grade.
3. Type Zero_weight for the material name in the tree.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Profiles and Materials
22
4. Add the material's density 0.00 for profiles and plates. 5. Save the new material type and grade by clicking OK. We will next use the new zero-weight material for the silos in order to exclude the silos from the total weight of the model. Change material of the silos
Select the two silos in the model and double-click on one of them while holding the Shift button down to open the properties dialog. 1. Select Zero_weight material from Select material list. 2. Close Select material dialog by clicking OK. 3. Click on the Modify button in the Column properties dialog to change the material of the silos.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Profiles and Materials
23
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Profiles and Materials
24
Applied Precast Concrete Detailing
Tekla Structures 11.0 August 30, 2005 Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING
i
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING
ii
Contents
8
Concrete Detailing....................................................................................................... 2 8.1 8.2 8.3
Connecting Concrete Members Using Connections and Macros...............................................3 Creating Stairwell ....................................................................................................................12 Using Pre-cast Concrete Custom Components .......................................................................23
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING
i
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING
i
7 Applied Precast Concrete Detailing
In this lesson
This lesson explains how to modify and finalize concrete members in Tekla Structures. You will also learn how to use custom components to create concrete members and to connect them.
Introduction
Concrete detailing can be done manually or by using system connections or custom components, which help you to automate the detailing. See more about concrete detailing in Tekla Structures Help: Detailing > Reinforcement > Concrete detailing and about connections in Help: Detailing > Getting Started > Basics > Connection concepts. For fully automatic connection creation, you can use the AutoConnection functionality to select and apply connections with predefined properties to selected parts. Use AutoConnection to have Tekla Structures automatically create similar connections for similar framing conditions. See more about AutoConnections in Tekla Structures Help: Detailing > Getting Started > AutoConnection > Using AutoConnection.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING
2
7.1 Connecting Concrete Members Using Connections and Macros In this exercise we will use system connections to connect the concrete beams and columns and to fit the hollow-core slabs to the steel beams. You can create connection macros either by using AutoConnections or manually. See more about connections in Tekla Structures Help: Detailing > Getting Started > Basics > Connection concepts and about AutoConnections in Help: Detailing > Getting Started > AutoConnection > Using AutoConnection. AutoConnections is the recommended way to create connections. Use AutoConnections to
automatically select and apply connections with predefined properties to selected parts.
Create corbels using AutoConnections and AutoDefaults With AutoConnection you can define groups of rules which Tekla Structures automatically applies when you use AutoConnection to create connections in a model. Define conditions for AutoConnections
There are six basic cases for AutoConnections:
For each of these it is possible to define several framing conditions. We will now define two different conditions, which check the material and number of secondaries for corbel connections. The first condition will use the Corbel connection (14), if only one beam is to be connected. For two beams we will use the Two sided seating with dowel (76) connection. 1.
Open the AutoConnection setup dialog by selecting AutoConnection… from Setup pull down menu.
2.
Right-click on the Beam to column web rule group and select Create additional rule sets. Tekla Structures creates a New rule set under the Beam to column web rule group.
3.
Open the Beam to column web rule group and right-click on the New rule set and select Edit rule set… from the popup list.
4.
Change the Rule set name to describe the use (Concrete Column).
5.
Select Primary material name and Secondary 1 material name from the Available rules list and move them to the right by clicking the arrow in the middle of the dialog.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING
3
6.
Write K* in the Exact value field for both rules.
7.
Add a new rule Number of secondaries by selecting it from the Available rules list and clicking the arrow.
8.
Set the Exact value to 1.
9.
Click OK to close the dialog and save the rule settings.
10. We will next define which connection this rule will use. Open the Concrete Column rule set and right-click on the No connection icon to select the Corbel connection (14). Now pick Select connection type…, which opens the Select component dialog. 11. In the Select component dialog select Corbel connection (14). Close the dialog by clicking OK.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING
4
12. You have now completed one rule definition. Next, copy the rule set to apply also for the Beam to column flange condition by right-clicking on the Concrete Column rule set and selecting Copy rule set from the popup menu. 13. Open the Beam to column flange rule group and right-click on any rule set and select Paste rule set from the popup menu.
You have now defined the beam to column connection for concrete members always to be Corbel connection (14) if the number of secondaries is 1.
14. Next, create another rule set for the Two sided seating with dowel (76) connection in case there are two beams to be connected to a column. Repeat steps 2 –8. Rule name is: Concrete column (2 sec) 15. Set the Exact value of "Number of secondaries" to 2. 16. Add a new rule Secondary 2 material name by selecting it from the Available rules list and clicking the arrow. 17. Write K* to Exact value field.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING
5
18. Click OK to close the dialog and save the rule settings. 19. Move the rule set above the Concrete column rule set using right button command Move up. The rules are read from the list in appearance order and the first valid rule will be used. 20. Open the Concrete column (2 sec) rule set and right-click on the No connection icon to select the Two sided seating with dowel (76). Now pick Select connection type…, which opens Select component dialog. 21. In Select component dialog select Two sided seating with dowel (76). Close the dialog by clicking OK. 22. Next copy the rule set to apply also in Beam to column flange condition by right-clicking on Concrete column (2 sec) rule set and selecting Copy rule set from popup menu. 23. Open the Beam to column flange rule group and right-click on any rule set and select Paste rule set from popup menu.
24. Click OK to close the dialog and save the rule settings.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING
6
Define AutoDefaults
With AutoDefaults you can create rules defining when to use different pre-defined connection properties. When the connections need to be modified (for example changing the beam size), Tekla Structures automatically redefines the connection properties using the AutoDefaults rules defined by you. See more in Help: System > AutoConnection > AutoDefaults setup > AutoDefaults setup. We will now create a new AutoDefaults rule group named Industrial building rules. This rule group could include all the rules needed to define when to use certain pre-defined connection properties for the entire project.
Create new rule group: Industrial building rules
Create new rule sets for Two sided seating with dowel (76)
1.
Click Setup > AutoDefaults… to open the AutoDefaults setup dialog box.
2.
Right-click in the dialog and select New rule group, and a rule group named New appears.
3.
Select the New rule group, press the F2 key and type: Industrial building rules.
4.
Press OK to save the settings.
We will now create an AutoDefault rule for Two sided seating with dowel (76) and use it in the Industrial building rule group. 1.
Open the AutoDefaults setup dialog from Setup > AutoDefaults… pull down menu.
2.
Browse to Two sided seating with dowel (76) under Industrial building rules group.
3.
Right-click to create an additional rule set.
4.
Select the New rule set under Two sided seating with dowel (76) and select Edit rule set… from the right-click popup menu.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING
7
5.
Write a new name for the rule set: Corbels400-800.
6.
Select Primary depth from Available rules list and move it to the right using arrow button in the middle of the dialog.
7.
Set Minimum value to 400 and Maximum value to 800.
8.
Click OK to save the settings and close the dialog.
9.
Select connection parameters Standard.j30000076 under the Corbels400-800 rule set and right-click > Additional connection parameters...
10. Select the new connection parameters and right-click > Edit connection parameters. The connection properties dialog opens. 11. On the General tab, select the Industrial building rules for the AutoDefault rule group; it can also be None.
12. On all the tabs, set the fields that you want AutoDefaults to override to Default by selecting the options marked with the arrow symbol. Set all needed options, values and dimensions on all tab pages as shown below:
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING
8
13. Save the settings using Save as field, define the name Corbels400-800. 14. Close the dialog with OK. 15. Right-click on the connection parameters and pick Select connection parameters…
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING
9
16. Select Corbels400-800.j30000076 from Attribute File List.
17. Close the Attribute File List with OK. 18. Close the AutoDefaults setup dialog with OK.
Create connections
We will now use the AutoConnections and apply the AutoDefault rules which we just defined. 1.
Select all concrete beams and columns between grid lines C and F.
2.
From the Detailing pull down menu select AutoConnection…
3.
Select the Industrial building rules group for connection parameters.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING
10
4.
Click the Create connections button. Tekla Structures creates connections between concrete beams and columns using Corbel connection (14), which creates corbels and connects beams to columns if only one beam is to be connected. For two beams, Tekla Structures uses the Two sided seating with dowel (76) connection.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING
11
7.2 Create a Stairwell In this exercise we will create a stairwell and footings for it using a system macro and a custom component.
Create stairwell footings with the help of a custom component Import the custom component
Create the footings
First, we need to import the needed custom component into the model. 1.
Open the Component catalog by pressing Ctrl + F or from the Tools > Find a component… drop down menu.
2.
Right-click > Import…
3.
Select CastInPlaceCustomComponents300605.uel file in the browser.
4.
Click OK. The custom components are imported into the model and are ready for use.
The custom component will create a footing and supporting walls for the stairwell. Define first the values for the footing and the walls, then place them in the model. 1.
In the Component catalog, double-click on the CIP_FO_002 custom component to open the dialog.
2.
On the Footing tab, insert the values as shown below.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING
12
3.
Set the values on the Walls tab. Note that the 2.2 walls will not be created and therefore the profile size is set to zero.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING
13
4.
On the Position tab, set the Rotation to Back and the On plane and At depth fields to Middle position.
5.
Close the dialog with OK.
6.
In the PLAN +0 view, zoom in to gridline A between lines 5 and 6.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING
14
7.
Delete the 1800*1800 size footings below the columns on grid lines 5 and 6.
8.
Select the CIP_FO_002 custom component in the Component catalog.
9.
Pick the middle point between grid lines 5 and 6 on the line A.
The footing and the walls are created.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING
15
Insert additional walls
We will next insert supporting wall panels on gridlines 5 and 6 between the columns and the side walls. 1.
Double-click on the Create concrete panel icon to open the dialog.
2.
Fill in the values as shown below:
3.
Close the dialog by clicking the OK button.
4.
Pick the start and end points for each wall and close them with the middle mouse button. Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING
16
Insert a slab
Before creating the stairwell, we will insert a slab above the walls we just created. 1.
Double-click on the Create concrete slab icon to open the dialog.
2.
Set the slab height to be 300 mm, select K30-2 as the material and position it to be Front in depth with value 700.
3.
Close the dialog with the OK button.
4.
In the PLAN +0 view, pick the polygon position by clicking at the corner points.
5.
Close the polygon with the middle mouse button.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING
17
Create the stairwell using a macro Define the stairwell settings
We will create the stairwell using the Stairwells and elevator shafts (90) component. First we need to find the needed component. 2.
Open the Component catalog by pressing Ctrl + F or from the Tools > Find a component… drop down menu.
3.
Type "stair" in the search field.
4.
Click the Search button. All components having a word "stair" are listed.
5.
Double click the Stairwells and elevator shafts (90) component.
6.
Fill in the tab pages as shown below:
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING
18
On the Plan View tab, define the levels and wall dimensions for 1st, typical and top floors.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING
19
On the Openings tab, set the dimensions for doors.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING
20
On the Stairs and landings tab, define the placement and dimensions for stairs. 7.
Close the dialog with the OK button.
8.
In the PLAN +0 view, pick, first, the intersection of gridline A and the column inner side on line 5, then the intersection of line A and the column inner side on line 6. The stairwell is created.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING
21
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING
22
7.3 Using Pre-cast Concrete Custom Components In this exercise we will use pre-cast custom components for creating and connecting concrete members.
Insert a column shoe connection Import the custom component
First, we need to import the needed custom component into the model. 1.
Open the Component catalog by pressing Ctrl + F or from the Tools > Find a component… drop down menu.
2.
Right-click > Import…
3.
Select the file PrecastCustomComponents310505.uel in the browser.
4.
Click OK. The custom components are imported into the model and are ready for use.
5.
Double-click on the CO_CO_GR_02 custom component to open the dialog.
6.
Use the default the values as shown below.
7.
Close the dialog with the OK button.
8.
Pick the footing of the stairwell. Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING
23
9.
Pick the column on gridline 5. The column shoes and anchor bolts are created.
10. Repeat for the column on line 6.
Create plinth walls and wall panels Non-bearing plinth walls
For the plinth wall insulation we need first create a new material named "Stonewool" 1.
Open the Modify material catalog from File > Catalog > Materials > Modify…
2.
Right-click over the Miscellaneous branch and select Add grade.
3.
Select the new material and press F2, then type Stonewool
4.
Set the profile and plate density values to be 250 kg/m3
5.
Close the dialog with OK.
6.
Close also the Save confirmation dialog with OK.
We will now create non-bearing plinth walls on gridline A. First, we need to find the needed custom component in the component catalog. The component was imported together with the column – footing connection (CO_CO_GR_02). 1.
Open the Component catalog by pressing Ctrl + F or from the Tools > Find a component… drop down menu.
2.
Open the "Custom" folder
3.
Double-click on the EW_003 custom component to open the dialog.
4.
Fill in the fields on each tab page as shown below.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING
24
On the Main part tab set the dimensions and materials.
Define the dimensions and spacing of the insulation boxes.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING
25
Set the position to be Left on plane, Rotation to Top and Middle at depth.
Bearing plinth walls
5.
Click OK to close the dialog and apply the settings.
6.
Pick the start point at the columns outer side mid point at line 7.
7.
Pick the end point at the columns outer side mid point at line 6. A plinth wall is created.
8.
Create similar plinth walls between gridlines 5 and 1 on gridline A, one wall between each column.
9.
Create similar plinth walls on gridline F, one wall between each column.
Next, we will create bearing plinth walls on gridlines 1 and 7. 1.
Open the Component catalog by pressing Ctrl + F or from the Tools > Find a component… drop down menu.
2.
In the Custom folder, double-click on the EW_004 custom component to open the dialog.
3.
Fill in the fields on each tab page as shown below.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING
26
On the Main part tab set the dimensions and materials.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING
27
Define the dimensions and spacing of the insulation boxes.
Set the position to be Left on plane, Rotation to Top and Middle at depth.
Panels around the stairwell
4.
Close the dialog with the OK button.
5.
Pick the start point on gridline C at the 900*600 column's long side mid point.
6.
Pick the end point on gridline A, perpendicular to the start point.
7.
Create similar plinth walls between gridlines C and F.
8.
Repeat with reverse picking order at gridline 1. Note that you need to use reference pick with Ctrl button on grid line C at the 900*600 column's long side mid point, then pick the actual start point on gridline A, perpendicular to it.
Next, we will create outer panel with insulation around the outer part of the stairwell. 1.
Open the Component catalog by pressing Ctrl + F or from the Tools > Find a component… drop down menu.
2.
In the Custom folder, double-click on the EW_002 custom component.
3.
Fill in the fields on each tab page as shown below.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING
28
On the Picture tab, define the dimensions and materials. Note that the thickness of the inner panel is zero. Set the position to be Left on plane, Rotation to Top and Middle at depth. 4.
Close the dialog with the OK button.
5.
Pick the start and end points at the corners around the stairwell's bearing walls.
We should now have plinth walls and wall panels around the whole building. Next, we will connect the walls to each other.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING
29
Connect the walls using custom components Outer corners
We will now create corner connections between the walls on the outer corners. 1.
Open the Component catalog by pressing Ctrl + F or from the Tools > Find a component… drop down menu.
2.
Open the "Custom" folder
3.
Double-click on the EW_EW_GR_04 custom component to open the dialog.
4.
Fill in the fields as shown below.
5.
Close the dialog by clicking the OK button.
6.
oZo m into the intersection of gridlines F and 7.
7.
Pick the parts of the walls as shown on the dialog's Picture tab. End with the middle mouse button.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING
30
The connection is created.
8.
Use the component EW_EW_GR_06 for the corner at the intersection of gridlines 1 and F.
9.
Set the values on the Picture tab as in previous connection and put the up direction to –z.
10. Repeat for gridline A outer corners. Use EW_EW_GR_04 at grid line 1 and EW_EW_GR_06 at grid line 7. Corners around the stairwell
Next we will connect the walls around the stairwell.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING
31
1.
Open the Component catalog by pressing Ctrl + F or from the Tools > Find a component… drop down menu.
2.
Open the "Custom" folder
3.
Double click the EW_EW_GR_11 custom component to open the dialog.
4.
Fill in the fields as shown below.
5.
Close the dialog with the OK button.
6.
Z o om in to stairwell's inner corner on gridline 5 and pick the parts in order shown on the dialog, end with the middle mouse button.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING
32
A connection is created. 7.
Then go to the stairwell's inner corner on grid line 6 and make the connection using EW_EW_GR_12 custom component with Picture tab page values shown below. Use z– up direction on General tab. Picking order is the same as in previous connection.
8.
Use the manual fitting tool to adjust the stairwell's outer corners on gridlines 5 and 6. Before fitting, switch the "Select objects in components" on. a.
Select the "Create fitting" icon.
b.
Pick the panel to be fitted between grid lines 5 and 6.
c.
Point the fitting line with two points along joining parts' sides as shown in the first picture below.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING
33
Connections straight sides
on
d.
Repeat for the insulation.
e.
Continue with the panel on grid line 5 by picking it, then make a reference pick with Ctrl button down at the corner of the panel we just fitted. Point direction at the selected panel's corner and give a numerical value 15, then press Enter to get the start point for fitting line 15 mms from the panel's side.
f.
Pick the fitting line end point at the side of the insulation, perpendicular to the start point.
g.
Repeat for the opposite corner at grid line 6.
Now we will connect the parallel walls to each other. 1.
Open the Component catalog by pressing Ctrl + F or from the Tools > Find a component… drop down menu.
2.
Open the "Custom" folder
3.
Double click the EW_EW_GR_15 custom component to open the dialog.
4.
Fill in the fields as shown below.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING
34
5.
Close the dialog with the OK button.
6.
oZo m in to column in the intersection of gridlines A and 2.
7.
Pick, first, the panels in the order shown on the dialog, then the column, and end with the middle mouse button.
The connection is created between the walls and the column. 8.
Repeat to all similar cases around the building at concrete columns.
9.
On gridline F, use the component EW_EW_GR_14 for connecting the walls beside the steel columns with settings shown below.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING
35
Connect double-T slabs using custom components We will now connect the double-T slabs to each other using a seam-type custom component. 1.
Open the Component catalog by pressing Ctrl + F or from the Tools > Find a component… drop down menu.
2.
Open the "Custom" folder
3.
Double-click on the DT_DT_GR_01 custom component to open the dialog.
4.
Fill in the fields as shown below.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING
36
5.
Click OK to close the dialog and apply the settings.
6.
In the PLAN +7175 view, zoom in to the top right corner at gridline F between lines 5 and 7.
7.
Select the 50 mm thick slabs and hide them using right-click > Shift + hide.
8.
Pick the top most DT-slab (main part) then the next slab aside it (sec. part).
9.
Pick start and end points as shown below.
The connection is created.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING
37
10. Select the connection in the model and copy it 8 times to y direction -2400 mm.
11. Then select all the double-T slab seam connections and copy them 2 times to x direction -12000 mms.
Now all the double-T slabs should be connected to each other.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING
38
Create seam ring reinforcements using custom components Next we will create seam ring reinforcements around the hollow core-slabs using custom components. 1.
Open the Component catalog by pressing Ctrl + F or from the Tools > Find a component… drop down menu.
2.
Open the "Custom" folder.
3.
Double-click on the BE_D_004_SeamRing custom component to open the dialog.
4.
Fill in the fields as shown below.
Set the dimensions of the in-situ concrete and the placing of the rebars.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING
39
Define the seam ring reinforcement properties and placing. 5.
Close the dialog with the OK button.
6.
Pick the beam on gridline 7 at level +3850.
7.
Pick the intersection point of gridlines B and 7 at the end of the beam.
The reinforcements and the in-situ beam are created. 8.
Select the component and copy it to the upper levels (3500 and 95500 mms up).
9.
Create similar reinforcement to grid line 4 at two lowest levels putting the first seam rebar at 800 mms from the start. Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING
40
Applied Steel Detailing
Tekla Structures 11.0 Basic Training February 10, 2005 Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
Contents
Contents..................................................................................................................................i
1
Applied Steel Detailing ................................................................................................3 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8
AutoConnections .......................................................................................................................4 General about the Criteria for Creating Connections.................................................................6 Study the Connections Created.................................................................................................9 Create a New AutoConnection Rule Group.............................................................................13 Run AutoConnection ...............................................................................................................25 Create Steel Stairs ..................................................................................................................26 Create Stanchions ...................................................................................................................40 Create Railings........................................................................................................................43
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Contents
i
1
In this lesson
Applied Steel Detailing
In this chapter we will first create connections by using default AutoConnection / AutoDefault rules. We will get acquainted with the logic that defines how certain connections are created to certain positions according to the AutoConnection rules. We will then create new AutoConnection rules for this project, remove the existing connections and replace them using a new AutoConnection rule group. We will also study how AutoConnections react to changes in the model. We will then create steel stairs.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing
3
1.1 AutoConnections You can create connections either manually (as we did in lesson 2) or by using AutoConnections. Help: Getting started > Using components > Creating components Help: Getting started > AutoConnection > Using AutoConnection We recommend you to use AutoConnections for creating connections. When you use AutoConnection, Tekla Structures automatically creates connections using a predefined set of rules, or rule group. With AutoConnection, Tekla Structures automatically creates similar connections for similar framing conditions. When you are creating AutoConnections you can also choose which connection properties you want to use (AutoDefaults).
Run default AutoConnections Delete connections
1.
Create or open a pre-defined view where only steel members are visible.
2.
Select all the connections and delete them.
Create autoconnections
1.
Select all the visible parts in the model.
2.
Select Detailing > AutoConnection... to display the AutoConnection dialog box.
3.
Select a default rule group Basic for AutoConnection.
4.
Select a default rule group Factory defaults for AutoDefaults.
5.
Click the Create connections button.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing
4
The connections are created.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing
5
1.2 General about the Criteria for Creating Connections The AutoConnection setup is a tree structure containing rules. To apply a particular connection, the conditions within the model have to match all the rules in the branch containing the connection. The order of the rules in the tree is important. Tekla Structures uses the first rule that matches the conditions within the model.
Rule group The first level in the tree is the rule group: a user-defined group of rules for different standards, projects, manufacturers or models. You can create connections using the predefined rule group in the AutoConnection setup dialog box (as we did above). The dialog opens when you select Setup > AutoConnection… on the menu.
Framing conditions The second level shows the six different predefined framing conditions in AutoConnection setup which you cannot change.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing
6
Rule sets Under each framing condition you can create rule sets to specify which connection to use for specific conditions within the model.
Each rule set can include several single rules to filter the cases.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing
7
The name of the rule set is just a descriptive name that is displayed in the tree structure. The actual filtering is done according to criteria set in the rules.
Connections Under each rule set you can select the connection to apply if the rule set criteria is met. It is also possible to define that in a certain case no connection is to be created.
The order of the rules in the tree is important. Tekla Structures uses the first rule that matches the conditions within the model, so you should place the most limiting rule highest in the tree, and the most generic, lowest.
You can change the priority of a rule set by right-clicking on the rule set and selecting Move Up or Move Down.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing
8
1.3 Study the Connections Created We will now study two "beam to beam web" connections created by the default rule group Basic.
End plate Check rule set used
1.
Double-click on one of the straight beam to beam web connections around the silos. It appears to be End plate (144).
2.
From the Beam to beam web framing condition in the AutoConnection setup, check the names of the rule sets. No other rule set name (Round tube, RHS, CHS, Bracing) seems to match with the conditions in the model but the Default.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing
9
3.
Right-click on the Default rule set and select Edit rule set... to open the AutoConnection Rules dialog box.
You can see that there are no rules defined in the right pane under Rules in rule set. Since the Default rule set does not have any rules defined, all the Beam to beam web framing conditions that don't match with any other rule sets will match with the Default rule set. This is also the case with our example.
Tube gusset Check rule set used
1.
Double-click on one of the horizontal brazing connections on the gridline 1.
It appears to be a Tube gusset (20) connection. 2.
From the Beam to beam web framing condition in the AutoConnection setup, check the names of the rule sets. In the tree we can see that the first rule set name that matches our example conditions is RHS.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing
10
3.
Right-click on the RHS rule set and Select Edit rule set....
The only rule it contains is Secondary 1 profile type = 8 (square pipe, see the table below). So the rules match and the connection Tube gusset (20) is created.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing
11
4.
Close the AutoConnection Rules dialog box. We will also study the next rule set that could have matched the conditions.
5.
Right-click on the Bracing rule set and select Edit rule set....
We can see that the only rule is Secondary 1 Part name = BRAC*. So also the Bracing rule set matches the conditions in our example. However, since the RHS rule set comes before the Bracing rule set, RHS is used and connection 20 is created instead of connection 11. Study other connections
Study some more connections in the model.
Delete the connections
Finally, delete all the connections from the model.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing
12
1.4 Create a New AutoConnection Rule Group We will now create a new AutoConnection rule group for this project. We will create a rule group that automatically creates the connections created manually in Lesson 2, and, in addition, some connections needed for the Model2. In this exercise we will create the following rules for framing conditions: Framing condition
Rule set name
Rules in rule set
Connection
Beam to beam web
Purlin
Secondary1 part name = PURLIN
Cold rolled overlap (1)
Bracing
Secondary1 profile type = 8
Tube gusset (20)
Default
No rule
Shear plate simple (146)
Two sided
Number of secondaries = 2 Secondary1 part name = BEAM Secondary2 part name = BEAM
Two sided end plate (142)
Bracing
Secondary1 profile type = 8
Tube gusset (20)
Default
No rule
End plate (144)
Crane support
Secondary1 profile = IPE450
Welded Column with stiffeners (128)
Default
No rule
End plate (144)
Beam to column web
Beam to column flange
We will define rule sets for the following framing conditions: x
Beam to beam flange
x
Beam splices
x
Column splices
since we do not have those connections in our model.
Create rule group "Industrial building connections" Create new rule group
1.
Click Setup >AutoConnection… to open the AutoConnection setup dialog box.
2.
Right-click on the Basic rule group and select New rule group.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing
13
A new rule group named New appears. 3.
Select the New rule group, press the F2 key and edit the name to Industrial building connections.
Beam to beam web We will start creating rule sets for the Beam to beam web framing condition. By default, the framing conditions do not have any rule sets defined, only the connection type No connection. Create Default connection
Right-click on a connection No connection in the AutoConnection setup tree. 2.
Select connection type... to open the Connection Browser dialog box.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing
14
3.
Select Shear plate simple (146) and click OK to update the tree.
The tree is updated.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing
15
Rule for "Purlin" connections
We will now create additional rule sets to the Beam to beam web framing. 1.
Right-click on Beam to beam web framing condition and select Create additional rule sets. Two rule sets, New and Default, appear. The connection we chose now appears under both rule sets New and Default.
2.
Right-click on the rule set New and select Edit rule set...
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing
16
The AutoConnection Rules dialog box opens. 3.
Select a rule Secondary 1 part name from the Available rules list.
4.
Click on the right arrow button to move the selected rule into the list Rules in rule set.
5.
Write PURLIN as the Exact value for the rule.
6.
Define Purlin as the name for the rule set.
7.
Click OK and the tree is updated.
8.
Select the Cold rolled overlap connection for the Purlin rule set.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing
17
Rule for "Bracing" connections
1.
Create an additional rule set to the Beam to beam web framing.
2.
Right-click on the New rule set created and select Edit rule set…
3.
Add 8 as the value for the rule Secondary 1 profile type and name the rule Bracing, click OK.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing
18
Test the rules
4.
Select the connection Tube gusset (20) for the Bracing rule.
5.
Click Apply in the AutoConnection setup dialog box to save the editing so far.
We will now do a simple test to make sure our new rule group works. 1.
Select the parts of each conditions we have defined rules for (by using Ctrl).
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing
19
2.
Select Detailing > AutoConnection…
3.
Select the Industrial building connections rule group.
4.
Select Industrial building rules for connection parameters (the AutoDefaults file we created in lesson 2).
5.
Click Create connections.
6.
Check that a correct connection was created to each condition. Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing
20
Beam to column web Default connection
Set End plate (144) as the default connection for the Beam to column web framing condition.
Two-sided end plate
1.
Right-click on the Beam to column web framing condition and select Create additional rule sets.
2.
Right-click on the New Rule set and select Edit rule set...
3.
Edit the rule set to have the following rules:
4.
Number of secondaries: 2
5.
Secondary 1 part name: BEAM
6.
Secondary 2 part name: BEAM
7.
Name the rule set Two-sided and click OK.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing
21
8.
Bracing
Select Two sided end plate (142) as the connection for the rule Two-sided.
Instead of creating a new rule for bracing, we will now copy the existing Bracing rule from the Beam to beam web framing condition. 1.
Copy the rule Bracing from the Beam to beam web framing.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing
22
2.
Right-click on the first rule (Two-sided) in the Beam to column web framing condition and select Paste rule set.
Beam to column flange Default connection
Set End plate (144) as the default connection for the Beam to column flange framing condition.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing
23
Crane support
1.
Create additional rule sets.
2.
Right-click on the New rule set and select Edit rule set.
3.
Edit the rule set to have the rules Secondary 1 profile = IPE450.
4.
Select Welded column with stiffener (128) as the connection for the rule Crane girder.
5.
Click OK in the AutoConnection setup dialog box.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing
24
1.5 Run AutoConnection Create connections
1.
Select the whole model.
2.
Select Detailing > AutoConnection…
3.
Select the Industrial building connections rule group.
4.
Select Industrial building rules for connection parameters (the AutoDefaults file we created in lesson 2).
5.
Click Create connections.
6.
Check that a correct connection was created to each condition.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing
25
1.6 Create Steel Stairs We will now create steel stairs from level 3850 to level 7350 in the location where we left out the hollow-core slabs in lesson 1. We will create the stairs by using the U pan (S71) component.
You can also create steel stairs with component Stairs (S82). The advantage of U Pan (S71) is the ability to use library profiles, parametric profiles and custom parts to create steps. Also the positioning of bolts is easier.
Create stairs with default properties
Hide or filter out unnecessary parts to make the view easier to work in. You will need to see only the level 3850 beam on gridline 5 and the level 7350 beam on gridline 6.
1.
Double-click on the U Pan (S71) component.
2.
Pick the first point on the reference axis of the gridline 5 beam 1050 mm from the end point.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing
26
3.
Pick the second point (using ortho snap) on the reference axis of the gridline 6 beam.
The stairs appear, with default properties.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing
27
4.
Create component basic views of the stairs.
Position the stairs
On the Parameters tab page, change the Position in plane to Middle.
Define the stringers and the steps 1.
On the U pan tab page, choose the custom option shown in the figure. This enables the options to use any step profiles you want on the Parts tab page.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing
28
2.
On the Parts tab page, find the parametric profile shown below for the steps and edit the parameters as shown.
3.
Edit U200 for the stringer profiles.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing
29
The U Pan (S71) component can create steps from library profiles, parametric profiles or custom parts.
Set steps rotation
On the Parameters tab page, change the Steps rotation to Back.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing
30
Position stairs according to steps and define landings
The definition points of the stairs refer to treads instead of stringers. We will now move the definition points of the stairs to position the steps according to the drawing details above. Position the stairs according to first and last steps
1.
Select the stairs and then its lower handle.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing
31
2.
Move the handle according to the detail shown above.
You can either create the stairs directly in the correct position or create them between two points and then adjust these definition points of the stairs later.
3.
Check the dimensions by using the measure tool in the front view.
4.
Move the upper handle according to the drawing detail in the same way.
1.
In the component front view, measure the nosing distance.
2.
On the Picture tab page, edit the Nosing distance as shown to set the nosing to zero.
Set nosing to zero
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing
32
Now the steps are positioned the way we wanted. Define the landings
1.
Select the bottom landing type shown in the figure below.
2.
Edit the bottom flooring thickness to 200 according the detail drawing above.
3.
Edit the bottom landing length to 650 (the nosing distance 150 taken into account) according to the detail drawing above.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing
33
4.
Check the dimensions in the model with the measure tool.
5.
Edit, in the same way, the top flooring thickness and top landing length. The result should be as shown below.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing
34
Remove brackets, create and position the bolts The U Pan (S71) component, by default, creates and connects supporting L profile brackets underneath the treads.
We will now remove the L-profile brackets and position the bolts straight to the step profile.
Remove brackets and position the bolts
1.
On the Bracket tab page, select the option No Brackets.
2.
Edit the horizontal bolt size to 12.
3.
Edit the bolt distances to position the bolts according to the drawing detail above.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing
35
4.
Check the dimension with the measure tool in the model.
5.
Save the properties used.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing
36
Connect landings We will now use the Seating (30) component to connect the landings to the beams with a plate welded to the landing and bolted to the beam.
Create seating connection
1.
Double-click on the component Seating (30) in the component catalog.
2.
Pick a beam and then a landing to create a connection with default properties.
.
3.
Edit the cut distance to 0.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing
37
4.
Edit the plate dimensions (width changes the value parallel to the main part).
5.
Write zero (0) in the stiffeners thickness fields to delete the stiffeners.
6.
Edit the bolt positions.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing
38
Check the dimensions with the measure tool. Save the properties used.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing
39
1.7 Create Stanchions We are now going to create railings to our stairs. We will create stanchions separately on one stringer and the upper landing with the component Stanchions (S76) and then rails to the stanchions with the component Railings (S77). Create stanchions
1.
Double-click on the component Stanchions (S76) in the component catalog.
2.
Pick the first position at the lower end of the stringer as shown.
3.
Pick the second position at the end of the upper landing.
4.
Pick the stringer (1) and then the upper landing (2) as objects.
5.
Click the middle mouse button to end the command.
The stanchions are now created.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing
40
Adjust position and height of stanchions
1.
Edit the stanchion height to 1100.
2.
Edit the distance from the start point to the first stanchion to 100.
3.
Edit the distance from the end point to the last stanchion to 100.
Define stanchion profiles Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing
41
1.
On the Parts tab page, edit all stanchion profiles to PD40*4.
2.
Save the properties used.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing
42
1.8 Create Railings We will now create railings to the stanchions that we just created. For this, we will use the Railings (S77) component. We will remove the closures that the component creates and instead simply weld the rail ends to the first and last stanchions.
Create the railings
1.
Double-click on the component Railings (S77) in the component catalog.
2.
Select the stanchion option Use first and last. This option allows you to select only one stanchion (instead of selecting each one by one).
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing
43
3.
Select one of the stanchions.
4.
Click the middle mouse button to create the railings.
Remove closures
On the Picture tab page, edit the distances from the closures to the nearest stanchion to 0.
Define rail profiles Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing
44
Define middle rail distances
1.
Edit profile 1 to PD40*3 and profile 2 to PD20*3.
2.
Edit the top and bottom rail profile to 1 (number 1 refers to the profile defined in field 1).
3.
Edit the bottom rail profile to 0 in order not create it at all.
4.
Edit the middle rail profiles 2 2 2 in order to create three rails of profile 2.
1.
On the Picture tab page, edit the middle railing offset to -30.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing
45
Create railings to the other side
2.
On the Middle Rails tab page, edit the distances between the rails according to the above drawing.
3.
Select the option to end the middle railings at the stanchion outer edge level.
4.
Check the dimensions with the measure tool.
5.
Save the properties used.
Using the saved properties, repeat the creation of the railings to the stringer and upper landing on the other side. 1.
Create stanchions.
2.
Create railings.
3.
Edit the offset of the middle railings from -30 to 30.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing
46
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing
47
Numbering and Reports
Tekla Structures 11.0 Basic Training August 18, 2005 Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
Contents
8
Numbering and Reports.............................................................................................. 3 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 8.7
Numbering Basics .....................................................................................................................3 Number the Model .....................................................................................................................5 Check the Numbering, Create Reports......................................................................................7 Change Numbering Settings....................................................................................................13 Change Numbering Series ......................................................................................................15 Start Numbering from Scratch .................................................................................................18 Create Reports and Check Part Marks ....................................................................................20
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Numbering and Reports
i
8
In this lesson
Numbering and Reports
This lesson introduces the principles of numbering the model in Tekla Structures. You will learn: x
The options available for numbering your model
x
How marks are assigned in numbering
x
How to check part marks
x
To use report templates.
8.1 Numbering Basics Defining numbers to be used for parts You use numbering series to divide part, assembly and cast unit numbers into groups. For example, you can allocate separate numbering series to different part types (BEAM, COLUMN, BRACING, etc.) or according to which floor the part is located in (1st floor, 2nd floor, etc.). You can name the numbering series to which a part, an assembly or a cast unit belongs, using the part properties dialog box. The numbering series name consists of a prefix and a starting number. Part Position and Assembly Position numbers are material specific and apply only to steel by default. Concrete members have part prefix "Concrete", and the starting number is 1 and they have a Cast Unit Position number instead of an Assembly Position number. See more in Help: Modeling > Parts > Numbering parts > Defining numbers to be used for parts.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Numbering and Reports
3
Running the numbering When you initiate the numbering process, Tekla Structures assigns marks to parts, assemblies and cast units. You run the numbering by selecting Tools > Numbering > Modified or Tools > Numbering > Full. The Full option will check all parts in the model even if they have not been modified. The Modified option only checks the new and modified parts and is much faster. Help: Modeling > Settings and tools > Settings and tools reference > Tools>Numbering>Modified Help: Modeling > Settings and tools > Settings and tools reference > Tools>Numbering>Full
How marks are assigned in numbering In numbering, parts with the same Part prefix and Start number will be compared with each other. All identical parts within such a group will be given the same number. The prefix and start number together define what numbers the part will be given. E.g. if the prefix is PC and the starting number is 1 (steel columns in our model), the numbering result will be PC1, PC2, PC3, etc. Help: Modeling > Parts > Numbering parts > What affects numbering
Numbering settings Numbering is carried out according to the settings in the Numbering setup dialog box. In the Numbering setup dialog you can define how new or modified parts are handled in numbering. For example, you decide whether a profile name affects the part number, and define the degree of tolerance in comparing the parts in numbering. Help: Modeling > Settings and tools > Numbering > Numbering settings
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Numbering and Reports
4
8.2 Number the Model In lesson 5 (Basic Modeling 2) we defined the numbering series for the members in our model. Thus, the members already have the numbering series information but not the actual marks. If we try to create a report or a drawing, there will be a warning about the numbering not being up to date.
We will use Inquire object to see the current state of the numbering of parts and then we will number the model. Inquire a part
1. Select Inquire > Object… 2. Select any steel column. The Inquire object dialog box opens. The Part position and Assembly position marks are shown as PC/0 and AC/0 so the numbers shown are 1 less than the starting numbers defined for the column (PC/1 and AC/1). This indicates that the part and assembly have not been numbered yet.
Tekla Structures uses numbers to identify parts, assemblies and cast units when producing drawings and reports. You must have Tekla Structures number the model parts before you can create drawings or reports.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Numbering and Reports
5
Run full numbering
Select Tools > Numbering > Full from the pull-down menu. Now all the parts, assemblies and cast units in our model have up to date position numbers.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Numbering and Reports
6
8.3 Check the Numbering, Create Reports We will now check the marks assigned to parts, assemblies and cast units. Inquire part
1. Select Inquire > Object… 2. Select any column. The Inquire object dialog box opens. Now the steel columns have Part position and Assembly position numbers and the concrete columns have cast unit numbers (the position numbers may differ in your model).
The numbering is now up to date and we can create reports. We will next create an assembly part list and a cast unit list of the whole model. Help: Drawing > Printing > Printing reports > Producing reports on entire model
You can create reports already at an early stage of the project to check the model and get pre-bill of material lists at quotation stage, cut lists, bolt lists, weld lists etc. Create assembly part list and cast unit list
1. Click on the Report icon to display the Report dialog box.
2. Select Assembly_part_list report template from the list.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Numbering and Reports
7
3. On the Options tab, check the options as shown below.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Numbering and Reports
8
4. Click Create from all to run a report of the entire model. The report is now automatically displayed in a dialog. Also the text file is created in the model folder.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Numbering and Reports
9
5. Check the numbering range of the assemblies and parts. 6. Repeat the procedure above to create a cast unit list of the entire model. We will next create a cast unit list of all concrete columns in our model. We will name the report with a specific name in order to keep the information on the stage of the project. To keep the report files you have created, give them a specific name. If you try to create a report with the existing name, Tekla Structures asks before it overwrites the existing report.
Create cast unit list of concrete columns
1. Use select filter COLUMN_CONCRETE to select all concrete columns. 2. In the Report dialog box, edit report file name to read: cast_unit_list_COLUMN_02_02_04.xsr. (Next time you create the cast unit list of columns just change the date)
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Numbering and Reports
10
3. Click Create from selected. 4. The report is now displayed in a dialog box. 5. Select Tools > Open model folder to check that the actual text file appears in the model folder. Tekla Structures stores a full numbering history in the file: numbering.history. The file contains the following model numbering details:
Study the numbering history log
x
User who carried out the numbering and the date
x
Numbering Full / Modified
x
Numbering settings used
x
A list of defined numbering series
x
Information on the parts, assemblies and cast units numbered
1. Select Tools > Display log file > Numbering history log… This displays the numbering history in a dialog box. 2. For more information on the log file, see help file Help: System > Files and folders > Log files > Numbering history log.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Numbering and Reports
11
When you select a list entry that contains the ID numbers of the parts or the assembly, Tekla Structures highlights them in the model.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Numbering and Reports
12
8.4 Change Numbering Settings You may come across a situation in the middle of the project when you need to change the numbering settings. For example, if some parts have already been ordered from the workshop, you may need to have different part marks for additional parts even if they are the same as the existing ones. We will now choose the numbering setup option Take new number for new parts. As an example, we create some new parts to demonstrate the new numbering setup. Changing the numbering settings in the middle of the project can be dangerous. In a case where you absolutely need to change the settings in the middle of the project, make sure you understand how the changes will affect the part marks. Copy beams and columns
1. Select the Model 1 beams and columns on gridline 7. 2. Copy them twice 6000 mm in the x direction.
Change numbering settings
3. On the menu, select: Setup > Numbering… 4. In the New: field, choose the option Take new number, and click Apply.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Numbering and Reports
13
Number the model
On the menu, select: Tools > Numbering > Full. Always carry out a full numbering on the model after you have changed the numbering settings.
Inquire the result
1. Use the Inquire object command to compare the marks of corresponding old and new parts. 2. Study the changes in the numbering history log (the position numbers in your model may differ from the example below).
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Numbering and Reports
14
8.5 Change Numbering Series By defining a numbering series (numbering prefixes and start numbers) we can group parts, assemblies and cast units the way we want. This way we can allocate parts in a certain area of a building to a particular numbering series. We will now change the numbering series of the outermost frame that we copied by changing the start numbers from 1 to 1000. We will then change the numbering series of the end plates in the frame to 2001 by using the connection dialog box (which will overwrite the position number defined in the preferences dialog box).
Change the numbering series
1. Select the columns on the outermost frame. 2. Modify the numbering series (and only the numbering series) of the columns as shown.
3. Select the beams on the outermost frame. 4. Modify the numbering series of the beams as shown.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Numbering and Reports
15
When planning numbering, ensure that you reserve enough numbers for each series. If one series overflows into another, Tekla Structures might allocate the same number to different parts. Tekla Structures will warn you about series overlaps. View the numbering history log to check which numbers overlap. Change numbering series of the connection members
Number the model
1. Open the End plate 144 dialog box. 2. On the Plates tab, edit the End plate position number to 2001. 3. Modify all the end plate connections of the frame with only the Pos. No field checked.
On the menu, select Tools > Numbering > Full. Always carry out full numbering on the model after you have changed numbering series.
Inquire the numbers
1. Use the Inquire object command to compare the marks of corresponding old and new parts
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Numbering and Reports
16
2. Study the changes in the numbering history log. We will now delete the parts created in this lesson. Delete the frames
Delete the two frames created in this lesson.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Numbering and Reports
17
8.6 Start Numbering from Scratch After trying different numbering options (changing numbering settings and numbering series) there is a possibility that some earlier unwanted position numbers will remain. There may also be gaps in position numbers. Before you start creating drawings to issue, it is reasonable to start the numbering from scratch. This method will ensure that each part in the model will really get the position numbers according to the updated numbering series defined for them and no previous, unwanted numbers will be left. Clear numbers of all parts
1. Select all the parts in the model. 2. On the menu, select: Tools > Numbering > Clear selected.
Renumber all
3. Check-mark the option Renumber all in the Numbering setup dialog box.
4. Select Tools > Numbering > Full. By using the Unnumber selected command or Renumber all setting you will loose all information about previous numbers. These settings can be safely used only at the beginning of a project. Set the numbering settings for the project
5. Finally, set the numbering setup the way you want the numbering to be carried out in the project.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Numbering and Reports
18
6. Click OK. 7. On the menu, select: Setup > Save defaults. You must save the Numbering setup for the model with the command Setup > Save Defaults to restore the options by default when you open the model.
Use Setup > Load defaults command to see the saved Numbering setup options. It is recommended that you normally use Modified numbering. In these cases, Full numbering should be run instead of Modified numbering: x
when performing the first numbering after the numbering settings have been changed
x
when Standard part option is used
x
when Pop-marks are used in DSTV files.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Numbering and Reports
19
8.7 Create Reports and Check Part Marks Tekla Structures can produce many different reports from the information contained in the model. Study the available reports. You can also print the report with the Print… option.
Check reports Create the following reports and check the model: x
Part_list –Check the plate thicknesses f or abnormalities
x
Part_list –Check the numbering range
x
Part_list –Check zero lengths of m aterial
x
Part_list –Check the steel grades
x
Assembly_list –Check the num bering range for steel assemblies
x
Assembly_part_list –Check the main item profile (plates or flats may indicate incorrect welding)
x
Cast_Sequence_list –Check the num bering range
x
Cast_list –Check the mai n item profile Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Numbering and Reports
20
x
Material_list –Check that the grades that are used are correct
x
Rebar_schedule_FIN –Check the numbers and t ypes of rebars
Other checks Here are some other ways to check your model: x
Clash-check the entire model
x
Check the erectability of precast members
x
Use the view or select filter to ensure that beams are called BEAM, columns are called COLUMN etc.
x
Check the existence of marks on a marking plan and check that the updating of marks is done
x
Check that the Title block information on each drawing is correct.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Numbering and Reports
21
Template Editor
Tekla Structures 11.0 Basic Training March 16, 2005 Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
Contents
Contents ................................................................................................................................. i
1
Template Editor ........................................................................................................... 3 1.1
1.2
1.3
Create a New Template from Scratch........................................................................................3 Define template properties.........................................................................................................4 Insert template components and objects ...................................................................................5 Edit component properties.......................................................................................................14 Convert old Templates to new Format.....................................................................................16 Convert assembly_part_list.tpl template ..................................................................................16 Edit the template components .................................................................................................18 Edit template objects ...............................................................................................................19 Fit template components by the objects ..................................................................................22 Convert assembly_bolt_list.tpl template ..................................................................................22 Convert an AutoCAD File Into a Template...............................................................................25 Create a drawing title and revision templates ..........................................................................25 Insert the AutoCAD file and edit its contents ...........................................................................25 Break the template into two separate templates......................................................................29 Create a "bill of materials" template.........................................................................................31
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor
i
1
Template Editor
In this lesson
You will learn how to work with Template Editor. You will create a new textual template from scratch. You will also create two graphical ones –one by converting an old template and one by converting an AutoCAD block into a new template. There are links to help files in the text. It is recommended to read the help file for more detailed descriptions.
What are templates?
Templates are descriptions of forms and tables which can be included in Tekla Structures. The forms can be graphical to be included in drawings as tables, text blocks, drawing headers, or ASCII text form to be used as reports. The contents of the template fields are filled in by Tekla Structures using the templates at run time. Templates are created and edited with Template Editor, which is a separate application in Tekla Structures and can be run also standalone.
1.1 Create a New Template from Scratch Start the Template Editor
Template Editor can be opened in Tekla Structures Tools > Templates… drop-down menu both in modeling and drawing editors or, in the drawing editor, by clicking on the corresponding icon "Run template editor".
Create a new template
1.
We will first create a textual template to be used in report creation, which will list bolts, washers and nuts belonging to parts in an assembly. Create a new template by clicking on the New icon, or by selecting New from the File menu, or by typing Ctrl + N.
2.
Select "Textual template" as the template type.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor
3
3.
Click OK. A new empty template is created.
Define template properties Template properties define the size, margins and column usage of the output template. Read more about template page settings in TempEd Help: Template Editor > Working with templates > Editing template properties > Edit page and margin settings 1.
Double-click in an empty area in the template window to open the Template Page Properties dialog.
2.
Set the Width to be 80 characters and the Height to be 40 characters.
3.
Define View height to be 30 characters.
4.
Click OK.
5.
Select Options > Preferences from drop-down menu. Read more about preferences settings in TempEd Help: Template Editor > Menu Reference > Options menu commands > Preferences…
6.
Select Millimeters as graphical units.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor
4
7.
Click OK.
Now, let's save the template. Save the template
1.
Select File > Save as… .
2.
Browse to the Template folder and save the template file with the name Assembly_part_bolt_list.rpt.
Insert template components and objects The template layout is designed with template components. Template objects are then placed inside template components to add either graphical or textual data. The properties of components, objects and the template itself determine the final appearance. Read more about template components in TempEd Help: Template Editor > Working with template components . In this example template we need the components header, page header, 5 rows, page footer and footer to form an assembly –part –bolt –washer –nut list.
Insert template components
1.
Insert the template header and page header components by clicking on the "Header" and "Page header" icons on the Component toolbar.
2.
Insert the row components. For each row, after clicking on the "Row" icon in the Component toolbar, select the content type (assembly, part, bolt, …) from the dropdown list and click OK.
Each row usually represents an object from the Tekla Structures database. The content type defines what kind of data can be read into the row. Only the object specific attributes are available for each content type.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor
5
3.
Insert the template page footer and footer components by clicking on the Page footer and Footer icons on the Component toolbar.
The components appear in the template work area and are listed in the content browser on the left.
Edit the template components
1.
Next, give a descriptive name for the rows - Steel_assembly, Part, Bolt, Washer, Nut by selecting the row in the content browser and typing the name.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor
6
2.
Then, define the hierarchy for the rows according to the actual hierarchy in the model. In the model, the bolts, washers and nuts are attached to parts, which in turn form an assembly. Read more about the hierarchy of template components in TempEd Help: Template Editor > Working with template components > Working with rows > Use row hierarchy .
Select the Part row and click on the Shift row down a level button in the content browser.
3.
Then shift the Bolt, Washer and Nut rows below the Part row by selecting the row and clicking twice on the shift button.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor
7
The whole hierarchical structure is needed for collecting the data from the model. For example, bolt data cannot be collected directly under assembly –a part row is needed in between. Each row has an option "Hide in output" in case you do not want the row contents to be visible in the final printout.
Insert objects into header
Next, insert the template objects inside the components. In textual templates you can only use text strings and value fields. Read more about template objects in TempEd Help: Template Editor > Working with template objects 1.
First, insert text into the header by selecting Text in the Insert drop-down menu or by clicking on the corresponding A icon and typing the text in the Enter text dialog.
2.
Click OK and place the text in the header.
3.
Next put a value field next to the text by selecting Value Field in the Insert drop-down menu or by clicking on the corresponding Value Field icon and then point the position. Read more about value fields in TempEd Help: Template Editor > Working with template objects > Value fields.
The Select Attribute dialog opens. 4.
5.
Select the NAME attribute under the Project branch and click OK. Click on the + boxes on the left in the tree structure to open the sub-rows.
Double-click on the value field and type a descriptive name for the value field in the Value Field Properties dialog's Name field.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor
8
6.
Add DATE and TIME value fields and corresponding texts to the right end of the header. The objects also appear in the content browser.
You can open several templates simultaneously and copy-paste objects from one template to another. The Value Field Properties dialog can be opened also by double-clicking on the field name inside the content browser.
7.
Insert objects into page header
Select the DATE and TIME value fields and align them using the right mouse button command Align > Rights.
Insert texts into the Page Header according to the example below.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor
9
Insert objects into rows
Insert and align texts and value fields into the rows as shown below. In the Value Field Properties dialog, click on the Attribute… button to open the Select attribute dialog and then pick the attributes and give descriptive names to the value fields that appear in the content browser. Read more about attribute descriptions in Tekla Structures Help: System > Appendix D: Template fields.
Note: the Value Field names must be unique in every row. For example, if
you use the attribute NUMBER in different rows you should give a different name in the Value Field Properties dialog for each value field: NUMBER_of_assemblies, NUMBER_of_parts, etc.
Insert objects into page footer
Insert texts and a value field "PAGE" into the Page Footer according to the example below.
Insert objects into footer
1.
Insert texts into the Footer according to the example below.
Between the texts, add a value field which counts the total number of assemblies. Copy (Ctrl + C) the name of the value field to be counted from the content browser and open the Value Field Properties dialog. Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor
10
2.
Type the name for the value field and set the data type to be "Number".
3.
Click on the Formula… button to open the Formula Contents dialog.
4.
Select Total from the Value Field Function drop-down menu.
5.
Paste the name of the value field "NUMBER_of_assemblies" inside the quotation marks (you can also select it from a list which opens by clicking on the Select button), then click the Check button to verify the syntax.
6.
Click OK in the Check dialog.
7.
Click OK in the Formula Contents dialog.
8.
Click OK in the Value Field Properties dialog.
Sorting When the value fields are placed inside the template components, the next step is to define the sorting of the fields and rows. The sorting is done at three levels: x
Inside the value field alpha-numerically ascending or descending (A to Zor Zto A). Sorting of value field distinguishes all different values of the field and a new row will be written to each different value.
x
Between the value fields according to the appearance order in the Content Browser by sort order priority. The sort priority determines how several value fields affect the sorting of a row. Read more about value field sorting in TempEd Help: Template Editor > Working with template objects > Value fields > Set sort priority of value fields. Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor
11
x
The sort type of a row by sorting type values Combine and Distinct which separate or combine identical row contents. Read more about row sorting in TempEd Help: Template Editor > Working with template components > Editing component properties > Edit sort type of row.
Note: When you want to sum value field values, make sure that the sort type of the row containing the value field is Combine. This ensures that your will be
outputting only summary lines instead of repeating lines with information on individual database objects. Read more about summing field values in TempEd Help: Template Editor > Working with template objects > Value fields > Sum field values automatically.
Define sort order inside value fields
Define sort order between value fields
Define first the sorting inside the value fields. 1.
Double-click on the "Assembly_position" value field in the content browser or inside the template component and set the order to be "Ascending". The field values are sorted alphabetically from A to ,Zwhich can be seen in the content browser as an arrow.
2.
Repeat for the "Part_position", "Bolt_diameter", "Bolt_standard", "Bolt_length", "Washer_diameter", "Washer_standard", "Nut_diameter" and "Nut_standard" value fields in all rows.
Next, set the sorting between the value fields by giving the sort order priority in the content browser.
1.
Select the Assembly_position value field in the Content Browser and click on the Move item up button. You can also drag and drop the value field into a new location.
The assemblies become sorted first by assembly position number, then by amount of assemblies. 2.
Repeat for all value fields in the following rows as shown in the example below:
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor
12
Define sort order between rows
If all the rows have identical values in all value fields that are used in sorting, the rows are called "Duplicate lines". If you want to output only one line instead of outputting a line for each duplicate object, set the row sort type to be COMBINE. Then, for example, 5 pieces of assembly A/1 is listed in one row instead of 5 rows. 1.
Double-click on the "Steel_assembly" row in the content browser or the corresponding component border to open the Row Properties dialog.
2.
Set the Sort type to Combine.
3.
Click OK.
4.
Repeat for all other rows.
Summing When the row's sort type is set to "Combine", the value field can be summed. Value field summing has three options:
x
"Don't sum values" gives the value of an individual field.
x
"Sum values across all rows" gives a total sum of all identical value fields in the
whole template, independent of the hierarchical structure of the rows. x
"Sum values within one row" gives a sum of identical value fields inside the
hierarchical structure.
Define summing of NUMBER value fields
First, define the summing of the number of assemblies. 1.
Open the "NUMBER_of_assemblies" value field properties dialog.
2.
Set the summing option to Sum values across all rows.
3.
Close the dialog by clicking OK.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor
13
4.
Next, set the summing of the number of parts inside one assembly. Because the part row is hierarchically under the assembly row in the Content Browser, you must use the summing option Sum values within one row to get the number of identical parts inside one assembly. (If the option Sum values across all rows were used, the number of identical parts would be multiplied with the number of identical assemblies.)
5.
Define the summing of the number of bolts, washers and nuts using the Sum values within one row summing option.
Edit component properties Rules The row rule is used if a row is to be output only under some special conditions. Read more about rules in TempEd Help: Template Editor > Working with formulas and rules. In this example template, we want to list only workshop bolts and leave site bolts out. Therefore, a rule is needed to separate them and output only the shop bolts. 1.
Double-click on the Bolt row in the content browser or the corresponding component border to open the Row Properties dialog.
2.
Click on the Wizard button to open the Rule Wizard.
3.
First, select the attribute by clicking on the None button, which opens the Select Attribute or Value Field dialog.
4.
Select the attribute "SITE_WORKSHOP".
5.
Click OK.
6.
Set the Condition to be "Equals".
7.
Set the Value to be "Workshop"
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor
14
8.
Click OK in the Rule Wizard dialog.
The rule is generated into the Rule box. Read more about the Wizard in TempEd Help: Template Editor > Working with formulas and rules > Row rules > Rule Wizard dialog.
9.
Click OK in the Row Properties dialog.
10. Repeat for the Washer and Nut rows.
Height Next, edit the template component heights to fit the contents by selecting the component handle in the middle and dragging them.
The final template rows should look like this:
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor
15
1.2 Convert Old Templates to New Format When you open an old template file, the Template Editor automatically converts it to the new format. In the converted template, you need to do some editing: define the hierarchy, rules and sorting of the rows and fields. Read more about Template conversion in TempEd Help: Template Editor > Template Conversion.
Convert assembly_part_list.tpl template 1.
The converting process starts with opening the file to be converted. Select File > Open or click on the corresponding icon.
2.
Select the file assembly_part_list.tpl from the browser. It should be located in the Template folder of your environment folder of the Tekla Structures program folders.
Template Editor automatically recognizes an old file and prompts you to convert it to the new format.
3.
Click Yes. Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor
16
4.
Define the conversion options.
Always back-up the original file for later usage.
5.
Click OK. The converted template is opened with an info dialog about the grid spacing and a list of warnings is displayed. Read more about warnings in TempEd Help: Template Editor > Template conversion > Template conversion warnings.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor
17
Edit the template components 1.
Rename the template components using descriptive names. See previous section for the naming procedure.
2.
Define the hierarchy of the rows by shifting the part row down a level. See the previous section and Appendix I on how to define the hierarchy.
3.
Edit component rules. As the content type of the row is now defined in the Row Properties dialog, rules are no longer needed to define it. Therefore, the unnecessary rules can be removed. Open the Row Properties dialog and click on the Advanced… button.
4.
Select the rule and delete it.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor
18
5.
Click OK in the Rule Wizard dialog.
6.
Click OK in the Row Properties dialog.
Edit template objects Value fields
Check all value field contents: some of the attribute names are different from those in the Template Editor version 2.2, and the formula structure has changed as well. Read more about attribute names in TempEd Help: Template Editor > Template conversion > Troubleshooting conversion > Mapping attribute names and properties in template conversion. 1.
Open the value field properties dialog for each value field and check the attribute name. A warning is displayed if the attribute is unknown.
2.
Open the list of attributes by clicking on the Attribute… button.
3.
Select the correct attribute from the list and click OK.
4.
It is advisable to load the default settings for the attribute as prompted on the dialog.
5.
Define the sorting of the value fields after conversion, where needed. See the previous section for detailed sorting instructions. The same sorting rules apply to converted value fields as to those created by the user:
x
Check the alphabetical sorting of the value fields in the content browser and change the ascending / descending values if needed.
x
See the appearance order of value fields in the content browser and shift them to the correct location. The current order is converted according to the sorting order in the old template.
x
Also check whether similar rows need to be displayed.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor
19
6.
Rename the value fields to more descriptive ones. After conversion, the names appear
in the format field_ATTRIBUTE_NAME. Keep in mind that the value field names must be unique.
You can rename the objects directly in the content browser, without opening the properties dialog.
7.
Align the value fields with text objects. First, select the objects and then right-click and Align > Lefts.
8.
Go through the summing value fields in the footer. Change the formulas to have the correct value field names inside the brackets and quotation marks. See the previous section for more information.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor
20
9.
Next, change the color of the value fields. Select all value fields by picking them while holding down the Shift key.
10. Right-click and select Properties… . 11. Click on the Font button. 12. Change the color to red.
13. Click OK in the Select Font dialog. 14. Click OK in the Value Field Properties dialog.
Graphical objects
Next, edit the colors of all border lines in the template. 1.
Select all lines by picking them while holding down the Shift key.
2.
Right-click and select Properties… .
3.
Change the color to yellow.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor
21
4.
Text objects
Click OK.
Next, edit the colors of all text strings. 1.
Select all text strings of the same font size by picking them while holding down the Shift key.
2.
Right-click and select Properties… .
3.
Click on the Font button.
4.
Change the color to green.
5.
Click OK in the Select Font dialog.
6.
Click OK in the Text Properties dialog.
Fit template components by the objects The right side of template components can be fitted by the contents. Select the menu command Edit > Crop > Template Right Side. Empty spaces are cut off from the right side. The finalized template should now look like the example below:
Convert assembly_bolt_list.tpl template The second example of file conversion has an additional hierarchy definition for a missing object branch. 1.
The converting process starts again with the opening command.
2.
…and selecting the file to be converted: this time the file assembly_bolt_list.tpl.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor
22
Hierarchy
3.
Define the conversion options and …
4.
…edit the template components and objects like in the previous example but leave the hierarchy definition for the next task.
The whole hierarchy of the objects must be defined in the template (see appendix I) in order to get the data of sub-rows. In this example bolts are attached to some part, not to the assembly directly. Therefore, an additional row is needed between the assembly and bolt rows. 1.
In the components toolbar select "Row".
2.
Select "PART" as the content type
A new row is created. 3.
Double-click on the new row in the content browser or on the row border in the editor to open the Row Properties dialog.
4.
Enter a descriptive name for the row in the Content Browser.
5.
Move the row up between the Assembly and Bolt rows by selecting the row and clicking on the Move item up button.
6.
Shift the Part row hierarchically down a level under the Assembly row by clicking on the Shift row down a level button.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor
23
7.
Visibility
Select the Bolt row and shift it under the part row by clicking on the Shift row down a level button twice.
The Part row can now be hidden in the final output. 1.
Open the Part row's properties dialog.
2.
Tick the Hide in output field. The row is run, but not printed into final output.
3.
Click OK.
The hidden row is displayed as a dashed line.
New objects
The Part row needs some contents. Add a value field PART_POS with ascending sorting into the row in order to have all different parts listed. It will not be visible, because the row has the option "Hide in output". The final template should look like this:
The hidden objects (row and value field) are displayed as dashed lines.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor
24
1.3 Convert an AutoCAD File into a Template You can use AutoCAD (DXF or DWG – AutoCAD 2000 and older) files and MicroStation (DGN –MicroStation DGN 7) files in graphical templates. Template editor imports the files and converts their contents to a group of drawing objects. If you have designed a template with AutoCAD you can use free attributes in AutoCAD to mark value fields. Template Editor automatically converts them to value field objects as the file is imported. Read more about warnings in TempEd Help: Template Editor > Working with template objects > AutoCAD and MicroStation files > limitations in AutoCAD and MicroStation file imports.
Create a drawing title and revision templates Create a new template
Insert a row and define its properties
1.
Create a new graphical template by clicking on the New icon or by selecting New on the File drop-down menu or by typing Ctrl + N.
2.
Select Graphical template as the template type.
3.
Click OK. A new template is created.
1.
Insert a single row by clicking on the Row button on the Component toolbar.
2.
Select the content type to be "DRAWING", because we are inserting a drawing title block. The available attributes depend on the content type. If the file which will be imported has attribute fields, it is essential to set the row's content type so that the corresponding attributes are available in the template.
3.
Open the Row Properties dialog and give a descriptive name for the row.
4.
Set the row height to 100 mm.
5.
Click OK.
Insert the AutoCAD file and edit its contents Now you can insert the AutoCAD file inside the row. 1.
Select Insert > File….
2.
Pick the file you want to insert.
3.
Double-click on the spot where you want to position the lower left corner of the title block.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor
25
Template Editor opens a dialog for size and scale definition.
4.
Select the Scale radio button and set the scale to 1 –the AutoCAD block will be in scale 1:1 in the work area. If you want to define the size, select the Dimensions radio button and enter horizontal and vertical values.
The title block is inserted as a group of objects inside the row borders.
…and it appears in the content browser as a group.
Ungroup the inserted block
In order to edit the contents of the inserted block, you need to ungroup it first by selecting the group and right-click > Ungroup. Read more about groups in TempEd Help: Template Editor > Working with template objects > Editing template objects > Group or ungroup objects. The individual objects inside the block become editable and visible in the content browser.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor
26
Group the lines of the company logo
Objects, such as lines, are now separate and in some cases it is advisable to regroup them. Next, we will form a group of the lines, which form the company logo. 1.
oZom in to the logo with the middle mouse roll button.
2.
Using area select, select all the lines which form the logo.
3.
Right-click > Group. A group is created.
You can resize the group by dragging the corner handles. Group properties, like color, can be edited on the Group Properties dialog (select the group and right-click > Properties).
Define fonts for the texts
The fonts used in text objects are mapped to Tekla fonts. This may slightly distort the font alignment within the text object as the original font geometry is not available in Template Editor. You need to edit the text properties. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Select the text you want to edit. Right-click > Properties. Click on the Font… button. Select either a TrueType font or a Tekla font on the list. Select the font size. Select Ratio (h/w) in the Effects section and change it to "0.6". Click OK in the Select Font dialog. Click OK in the Text Properties dialog.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor
27
Define the value fields
1.
The attribute fields in the AutoCAD file have been converted into value fields, but the attributes need to be defined. Go through all value fields and set the attributes into the Formula field in the Value Field Properties dialog using the list under the Attribute… button. Read more about attribute descriptions in Tekla Structures Help: System > Appendix D: Template fields.
2.
Open the Value Field Properties dialog by double clicking the "PROJECTNO" value field in the content browser or in the work area. A warning of missing attribute is displayed and it can be ignored and closed by clicking the OK button.
3.
Push the Attribute… button to open the Select attribute dialog.
4.
Select the corresponding attribute from the list and accept with OK.
5.
Load the default settings for the attribute by clicking the Yes button.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor
28
6.
Close the dialog with OK.
7.
Repeat for the rest of the value fields.
8.
Finally, save the template.
Break the template into two separate templates You can open several templates simultaneously. Read more about working with multiple templates in TempEd Help: Template Editor > Working with templates > Creating, opening & saving templates > Work with multiple templates . Each template is displayed in its own window inside the work area and as a folder in the content browser. You can cut or copy template objects from one template and paste them into another template easily when multiple templates are open. We will next separate the revision lines from the drawing title and create a new template for them. 1.
Area select the objects –lines and value fi elds –which are to be cut from the drawing title template (deselect the row by holding the Ctrl key down and picking the border).
2.
Cut the objects using Ctrl + x or right-click > Cut.
3.
Create a new graphical template.
4.
Insert a row.
5.
Set the row content type to be REVISION.
6.
Because the area needed for pasting must be large enough, edit the template page width to be 215 mm. Double-click on an empty area to open the Page Properties dialog.
7.
Paste the objects inside the row using Ctrl + v or right-click > Paste.
The value fields and drawing lines are inserted into the new template. Now, save both templates.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor
29
Edit the new template
The new template needs some editing. We will create a header and a footer and move the texts and the some of the lines into them leaving only the value fields into the row. 1.
Create the header by clicking on the Header icon.
2.
Create the footer by clicking on the Footer icon.
3.
Select the lines, which form the upper row above the Value fields.
4.
Cut and paste them to the header.
5.
Select the texts and the lines which form the lower row below the value fields.
6.
Cut and paste them to the footer.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor
30
7.
Select the row and resize the template components to fit the objects inside them using the Edit > Crop > Template right side and Edit > Crop > Component height functions.
8.
Save the template.
Create a "bill of materials" template Using the same procedure of AutoCAD file insertion, we will next create a bill of materials template to be used in multi-drawings. Create a new template
Insert a row and define its properties
1.
Create a new graphical template by clicking on the New icon or by selecting New from the File drop-down menu or by typing Ctrl + N.
2.
Select Graphical template as the template type.
3.
Click OK. A new template is created.
1.
Insert a single row by clicking on the Row button on the Component toolbar.
2.
Select the content type to be "ASSEMBLY", because we are inserting an assembly related file block.
3.
Check the dimensions of the AutoCAD block and edit the template page properties accordingly. Double-click on an empty space to open the page properties dialog. It is essential to have the same dimensions in the template and in the AutoCAD file in order for the scale to be the same.
Insert the AutoCAD file Now you can insert the AutoCAD file inside the row. 1.
Select Insert > File… on the drop-down menu.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor
31
2.
Pick the file which you want to insert in the browser.
3.
Double-click on the spot where you want to position the lower left corner of the block and set the scale to be 1:1. A group of objects is inserted inside the row borders.
Design the template contents and break the block Next examine the file contents and design your template contents: x
What template components do you need?A header, some rows…
x
What content types do you need for the rows?Assembly, part, bolt…
x
Do you need hierarchy between the components?Assembly –part –bolt relations…
x
What kinds of objects do you need?Value fields –what attributes should you use?
x
How do you divide the contents of the block?What object goes where? When you design your template structure, always keep in mind that the attributes collect data directly from objects in the Tekla Structures model and the content type of the rows determine what attributes are available. Also note the hierarchical structure of the objects in the model and how it affects the template.
Create template components and define content types
Next, insert the needed template components: header, which will have the labels, rows for assembly, part and bolt data and some rows for empty space. Click on the "Header" and "Row" button on the Component toolbar and define the content types for the rows: assembly, part and bolt –leave tw o row's content type undefined.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor
32
Define the hierarchy
Because we would like to list all parts under the assemblies which they form, we need to set an assembly–part hierarchy for the rows. Bolts will be listed separately, so no hierarchy is needed there. In the Content Browser, select the part row and shift it down a level under the assembly row using the Shift row down a level button.
Divide AutoCAD block contents into template components
Now, we can start putting the template objects into the components. Start by ungrouping the AutoCAD block. 1.
Select the block.
2.
Right-click > Ungroup.
Cut the objects from the block and paste them into the components which you have created.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor
33
1.
Select the texts and lines which will go into the header and cut and paste them.
2.
Then cut and paste the texts and lines which belong to the assembly row.
3.
Continue with part row objects.
4.
Then move the bolt "header" information into the empty content type row.
5.
Followed by the bolt row contents.
6.
And finally contents of one single, empty row –just the lines, without any texts.
Then copy and paste the last empty row with the contents into the template and lift the new row up under the assembly row using the Move item up button in the Content Browser. Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor
34
We now have all the needed template components –and more, so we can clean the template by deleting the first row with the remains of the block, which are no longer needed. Select the components and resize them to fit the objects inside them using the Edit > Crop > Template right side and Edit > Crop > Component height commands.
Insert value fields
When the template components are filled with the correct objects from the AutoCAD block, we will replace the texts inside the rows with value fields, which will collect data automatically from the Tekla Structures model. When deciding what attributes should be used, note the content type of the row and the label in the header, which refers to the contents of the value field. Read more about attribute descriptions in Tekla Structures Help: System > Appendix D: Template fields. 1.
Start with the assembly row and select the number under Q TY.
2.
Delete it.
3.
Pick the value field icon and point the location inside the Assembly row. A list of assembly related attributes opens in a separate dialog.
4.
Select the NUMBER attribute.
5.
Continue with the "Ship mark" by deleting the text and inserting a value field which has the ASSEMBLY_POS attribute.
6.
Complete the row by replacing the texts with the corresponding value fields.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor
35
7.
Set rules for rows using Wizard
Insert value fields also into the part and bolt rows the same way.
After component objects are in place, you can define the rules for rows. We will next use the rule wizard for creating an "if– then– else" stat ement for the bolt title row to place the row into the 23rd row of the page. 1.
Open the Row Properties dialog of the row having the bolt title information.
2.
Click on the Wizard button.
3.
Click on the None button under the attributes.
4.
Select the ROW_IN_PAGE attribute from the list. The attribute name appears in the button.
5.
Then set the value to be equal to "23".
6.
Click OK. The rule is generated automatically: if (GetValue("ROW_IN_PAGE") == "23") then Output() else StepOver() endif
7.
Close the properties dialog with OK and save the template.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor
36
APPENDIX I
Hierarchy of objects in a cast unit in a Tekla Structures model
CAST UNIT PART SURFACING REBAR MESH BOLT WASHER NUT STUD HOLE
ASSEMBLY PART SURFACING REBAR MESH BOLT WASHER NUT STUD HOLE WELD DRAWING REVISION
DRAWING REVISION
DRAWING REVISION
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor
37
Principles of Drawings
Tekla Structures 11.0 Basic Training March 16, 2005 Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
Contents
10
Principles of Working with Drawings ........................................................................ 3 10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4 10.5 10.6 10.7 10.8
Integration between Drawings and the Model............................................................................4 Creating Drawings .....................................................................................................................6 Drawing List.............................................................................................................................12 Drawing Levels ........................................................................................................................16 Drawing Objects ......................................................................................................................22 Drawing Layouts......................................................................................................................26 Plotting Drawings.....................................................................................................................38 Controlling Drawing Revisions.................................................................................................41
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings
i
10
In this lesson
Principles of Working with Drawings
This chapter introduces the principles of working with drawings in Tekla Structures. We will first explain the integration between drawings and the model. Then we will introduce general arrangement (GA) drawings and create an example drawing from the Basic Model 1 model (see the picture below presenting the steel frame). GA drawings will be used as examples throughout this lesson.
We will also: x
Introduce other drawing types available in Tekla Structures
x
Introduce the drawing list
x
Introduce the various levels of editing the drawings
x
Study the drawing objects and layout
x
Plot drawings
x
Introduce revision control
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings
3
10.1 Integration between Drawings and the Model Tekla Structures stores all the important project information in one place, i.e. the model. Drawings and other printouts such as reports, nc data files etc. are output produced directly from the model.
Tekla Structures model The model contains all the important project information: x
Parts' geometrical and structural information
x
Part marking
x
Bolts
x
Bolt marking
x
etc.
All the modifications must be done directly in the model. The model is always modified in the Tekla Structures Model Editor.
Drawings The drawings are current views of the members contained in the model with added definitions for: x
the sheet size to be used
x
the way titles and tables are placed on the sheets
x
what is dimensioned and how
x
which marks are displayed
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings
4
x
etc.
You can create drawings at any stage of a project. Some of the drawing commands are located in the Model Editor and some are in the Drawing Editor. You will find all the commands for creating and managing drawings in the Model Editor. To view and edit drawings, you will use the Drawing Editor. Help: Drawing > Introduction to Drawings
Changes in the model members Changes in the model members can result in the drawings no longer being up-todate. The following are examples of changes that affect the drawings: x
A part's profile or geometry changes
x
Parts have been added or deleted
x
The number of identical parts has changed
Tekla Structures updates the related drawings the next time you number the model. Numbering does not have to be up-to-date to create or open general arrangement drawings.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings
5
10.2 Creating Drawings We will now introduce general arrangement (GA) drawings and create an example drawing of the Basic model 1 model.
General Arrangement (GA) drawings The Tekla Structures can be used to create general arrangement (GA) drawings. GA drawings can contain several views, which can include the whole model or any part of it. With the GA drawings you can create erection, foundation and other plans, as well as details from views in the model. You can create general arrangement drawings from one or several named model view(s) with the following options: x
Create one drawing for each selected view
x
Add all selected views to one drawing
x
Create an empty drawing
You can create an empty drawing and add named model views to the drawing in the Drawing Editor. The views must exist but they do not necessarily have to be open. You cannot modify the appearance, such as the viewing angle, of model views in the Drawing Editor. Therefore, check and modify the appearance of model views in the Model Editor before creating GA drawings. For example, check that the plan views are really 2D views, and rotate the rendered 3D views the way you want them to be shown in the drawing. See Lesson 12 for more information about creating GA drawings. In the example below, we will create a general arrangement drawing from Basic Model 1 by including several named model views in the drawing. You do not need to number the model, or update numbering to create or open general arrangement drawings.
Start GA drawing creation
To create a GA drawing that contains selected views, e.g. 3d, GRID 3 and GRID A, from Basic Model 1: 1. Open Basic Model 1. 2. Select Drawing > General arrangement drawing... from the menu. 3. Select the 3d, GRID 3 and GRID A views in the Create general arrangement drawing dialog box. Then select the option All selected views to one drawing.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings
6
You can select multiple views (or toggle the selection) in the dialog box above by holding down the Ctrl key and picking each view separately. GA drawing views are automatically labeled with the current view name. With the One drawing per view option you can select all the plan views in the dialog box, and create separate drawings with predefined drawing properties all at once. Define drawing properties
To define the properties of the GA drawing: 1. Click the Drawing properties... button to open the General arrangement drawing properties dialog box. 2. Select A1-BLANK settings from the option menu and click Load. 3. Give the drawing a distinctive name in the Name field, e.g. STEEL FRAME (or CONCRETE FRAME if your model was made of precast concrete beams and columns). 4. Click the View... button to open the General - view properties dialog box.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings
7
5. On the Attributes tab, change the drawing scale to 100 and click OK to apply the scale and close the dialog box.
If you have a steel frame
If you have a concrete frame
6. Click the Weld… button to open the General - welding properties dialog box.
6. Click the Reinforcement… button to open the General – reinforcing bar properties dialog box.
7. On the Content tab, set the Visibility of site and workshop welds to None and click OK.
7. On the Bar content tab, set the Visibility of all reinforcing bars to Not visible and click OK.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings
8
8. Click the Filter... button to open the General - filter properties dialog box.
8. Click the Filter... button to open the General - filter properties dialog box.
9. On the Parts tab, use the Filter by Material field to filter drawing objects so that no concrete parts are shown. Enter K* as the filter string, tick the Not option on and click OK.
9. On the Parts tab, use the Filter by Name field to filter drawing objects so that only beams and columns are shown. Click OK.
10. In the General arrangement drawing properties dialog box, save the selected drawing properties with a unique file name, e.g. steelframe (or concreteframe), Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings
9
by typing the file name and then clicking the Save as button. Drawing property files steelframe.gd and steelframe.gd.more are created in the ..\Basic Model 1\attributes folder.
11. Click OK to apply the selected GA drawing settings and to close the General arrangement drawing properties dialog box. For more information on drawing properties, see Help: Drawing > Drawing properties. Create and open the GA drawing
To create and open the GA drawing: 1. Select the Open drawing checkbox in the Create general arrangement drawing dialog box to have Tekla Structures automatically open the drawing.
2. Click Create. 3. Check that the created GA drawing is as shown below.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings
10
All of the views in the GA drawing will be created according to the same GA drawing properties you applied. If some views need different properties, you have to modify the view properties afterwards in the Drawing Editor.
You can first define the GA drawing properties by selecting Properties > General arrangement drawing... from the menu, and then load and apply the desired properties. After that open the Create general arrangement drawing dialog box to create the GA drawing with the selected views.
Other drawing types In addition to general arrangement drawings, four other types of drawings can be created in Tekla Structures. These will be presented in greater detail in Lessons 11 and 13. Single-part drawings are workshop drawings of individual steel parts. Drawings can be produced for any steel part in the model. The single-part drawings can contain holes but welded parts cannot be included. This drawing type is available in Steel Detailing module. Assembly drawings are typically workshop drawings where details of an assembly consisting of steel parts are presented for fabrication. In most cases, an assembly consists of single steel parts that are either bolted or welded to the main steel part. This drawing type is available in Steel Detailing module. Cast unit (CU) drawings are formwork or reinforcement drawings of reinforced concrete structures such as foundations. This drawing type is available in the Precast Concrete Detailing module. Multi-drawings are workshop drawings which gather together several single-part or assembly drawings on one sheet. This drawing type is available in Steel Detailing module.
Lesson 11 Assembly and single-part drawings / Cast unit drawings Lesson 13 Multi-drawings and multinumbering
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings
11
10.3 Drawing List We will briefly cover the Tekla Structures drawing list. You can use the drawing list to: x
Select and open your drawings for viewing and editing in the Drawing Editor
x
Update, clone and delete drawings
x
Update GA drawing marks
x
Display and filter drawings shown in the list
x
Choose drawings to select parts in the model, or show only the drawings of the selected parts in the list (not available for GA drawings)
x
Lock, freeze and issue drawings
x
Add revisions to drawings
x
Modify properties of several drawings at a time.
The drawing list also displays the creation and modification dates of the drawings, drawing size and type, etc. See Lesson 13 for updating GA drawings.
Opening and closing drawings You can only have one drawing open at a time. If you already have a drawing open, Tekla Structures prompts you to save that drawing before opening the next one. Open drawing list and a GA drawing
To open the drawing list and a drawing in Tekla Structures: 1. Select Drawing > List… from the menu or click the Open drawing list icon on the Standard toolbar.
2. In the drawing list select the previously created G [1]drawing. 3. Click Open, or double-click on the drawing to open it in the Drawing Editor. See also Help: Drawing > Getting started with drawings > Opening drawings. When selecting GA drawings in the drawing list, the activated buttons at the bottom of the Drawings dialog box are Open, Update marks, Delete and Cancel. The table below describes their functionality.
Button
Description
Open
Opens the selected drawing in the Drawing Editor. You can only select one drawing from the list at a time. If the Open button is grayed, you have more than one drawing selected. You can also double-click a drawing on the list to open it. See also Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings
12
Button
Description
Opening drawings.
Close a drawing
Open next/previous
Opens the previous or next drawing in the list.
Update
Updates frozen drawings, and recreates unfrozen drawings. Locked drawings are not updated.
Update marks
Updates marks in selected drawings.
Clone…
Clones the selected drawing for a similar part.
Delete
Deletes selected drawings. You cannot delete locked drawings.
Cancel
Closes the dialog box.
To close the drawing in the Drawing Editor: 1. Select File > Close drawing from the menu or click the cross in the upper right corner of the drawing window. 2. Tekla Structures asks: Do you want to save the current drawing? 3. Select Save or Save and Freeze to keep the changes that you have made to the drawing, or close the drawing without saving by clicking No.
Drawing list contents All of your existing drawings are shown in the drawing list. The example below shows the header line information that is available in the drawing list.
See also Help: Drawings > Getting started with drawings > Drawing list. The table below explains the header line items of the drawing list. Item
Explanation
Flags
Flags are characters (I, L, F, n, *, etc.) at the beginning of each row. They indicate the drawing status.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings
13
Item
Explanation
Dates
The creation and modification dates of the drawing.
Revision
The revision number or mark of the drawing.
Size
Paper size, which is shown automatically.
Type
The drawing types are identified by the following letters: x
W for single-part drawings.
x
A for assembly drawings.
x
C for cast-unit drawings.
x
G for general arrangement drawings.
x
M for multi-drawings.
Mark
The drawing mark is the number of the part from which the drawing was created. You cannot change drawing marks.
Name
You can add a drawing title using the Name field in the drawing properties dialog box.
Title 1, Title 2, Title 3
Add extra drawing title fields to the drawing properties dialog box.
User-defined attributes
Include up to 20 user-defined attributes in drawing lists.
You can sort the order of the drawings by clicking the desired header line button in the drawing list. You can adjust the column widths of the drawing list and Tekla Structures will keep the changes.
Drawing status flags The status of drawings is represented by flags, which are shown on the left hand side of the drawing list. For more information about drawing status flags, see Help: Drawing > Getting started with drawings > Drawing status flags. Lock and Issue flags can be manually added to the selected drawings. The M flag appears automatically on issued GA drawings that have been modified.
Lock GA and other drawings from being accidentially deleted or changed.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings
14
Use the buttons on the right hand side of the drawing list to change the status of a drawing. Alternatively, select the drawing in the list, right-click to open the pop-up menu and change the drawing status.
Lock a GA drawing
To lock and unlock a GA drawing: 1. Select the G 1[ ]drawing in the drawing list. 2. Click the Lock - On button and the L flag will appear. 3. Try to delete the drawing by clicking Delete. 4. Try to open the drawing by clicking Open. 5. Click the Lock - Off button to reset the lock. 6. Click Open. The drawing opens in the Drawing Editor. You cannot open or delete a locked drawing without unlocking it.
Issue a GA drawing
To issue a GA drawing: 1. Select the G 1[ ]drawing in the drawing list. 2. Click the Issue - On button and the I flag will appear. 3. Open the drawing to view the GA drawing title. 4. Check that the issue date is shown correctly in the drawing title.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings
15
10.4 Drawing Levels You can edit drawings in the Drawing Editor on three levels: x
Drawing properties
x
View properties
x
Object properties
For more information about the drawing properties and different drawing levels, see the following help files: Help: Drawing > Introduction to drawings > Three levels of editing drawings Help: Drawing > Drawing properties Lesson 12 GA drawings
Modify drawing properties On the highest level you can change the drawing properties, which affect all of the objects in the drawing. Modify part's color on drawing level
To change the GA drawing properties, e.g. the color of parts, in the Drawing Editor: 1. Select Properties > Drawing... on the menu or double-click on the drawing to open the General arrangement drawing properties dialog box. 2. Click the Part... button to open the General - part properties dialog box. 3. Select the Appearance tab. 4. Change the Color of Visible lines, e.g., to green. Check and see that the checkbox is marked with a tick.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings
16
5. Click Modify and OK. Create another GA drawing by following the steps described in Chapter 10.2 Creating drawings. Select different views, e.g. the PLAN +0 and PLAN +13400 views, to be included in the drawing. Change grid visibility of many GA drawings
To simultaneously change the drawing properties, e.g. grid visibility, of more than one GA drawing: 1. Open the drawing list in the Model Editor. 2. Select two GA drawings in the drawing list by holding down the Ctrl key. 3. Right-click to open the pop-up menu. 4. Select Properties... or press Alt+Enter as shortcut to open the General arrangement drawing properties dialog box.
5. Click the Grid... button to open the General - grid properties dialog box. 6. Click the On/Off button to clear the checkboxes. 7. Change the grid visibility to Not visible.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings
17
8. Click Modify and OK. 9. Click OK to close the General arrangement drawing properties dialog box. 10. Open the modified drawings one at a time to check that the changes were carried out correctly. Whenever possible, you should modify drawings by changing the drawing properties. These modifications also remain when the drawing is recreated due to a model change.
Modify view properties The second level is to edit the view level, where you modify the selected drawing's view. Modify properties of selected view
To present hidden lines of adjacent parts and to add part marks to the GRID A view of the G 1[ ]drawing: 1. Double-click on the border around the GRID A drawing view to open the View properties dialog box.
Show hidden lines of parts
2. Click the Part… button to open the View part properties dialog box. 3. Select the Content tab. 4. Click the On/Off button to clear the checkboxes. 5. Turn the Hidden lines option on. Check that the checkbox is marked with a tick.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings
18
6. Click Modify and OK. Change part mark content
7. Click the Part mark… button to open the View part mark properties dialog box. 8. On the Content tab, remove the <
> from the Elements in mark list for the main parts, and add Profile to the list.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings
19
9. On the General tab, change Visibility in view to always and click Modify and OK.
The GRID A view should now show the hidden lines of adjacent parts and part marks representing the main part profiles.
Dashed line type in part mark frames and leader lines indicate that the object is behind another object in the drawing.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings
20
Modify object properties The third and lowest level is to edit at the object level, where you change individual objects in the drawing. Modify frame and leader line of a single part mark
To change the properties of a single part mark: 1. In the GRID A view, double-click on the part mark of the RHS profile (diagonal brace) to open the Part mark properties dialog box. 2. On the General tab, change the frame and leader line types as shown below.
3. Click Modify and OK. The part mark should now look like the following.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings
21
10.5 Drawing Objects In Tekla Structures, the term drawing object refers to lines, rectangles, arcs, circles, poly-lines, polygons, clouds, symbols, text, DWG/DXF files, marks and dimensions. General arrangement drawings are not automatically dimensioned in Tekla Structures. Therefore you need to dimension GA drawings manually. In addition, you may want to include additional drawing objects for temporary and/or revisionrelated information, e.g. clouds and text. For more information, see Help: Drawing > Editing drawings.
Create Drawing Objects In the G 1[ ]drawing, we will manually dimension the location of the diagonal bracing connection and add a cloud and a note text to the connection. Create manual dimensions
To add manual Y-dimensions to the diagonal bracing connection (on gridline 3) in the GRID A view: 1. Set the snap settings on the Drawings: Snap settings toolbar as shown below.
2. To enable the tentative snap, which helps with the selecting of points, check that the Xsnap is set on in the Setup menu.
3. Click the Create y dimension icon on the Drawings: Dimension toolbar.
4. Snap, first, to the center point of the connection created between the four diagonal braces, and then to the intersection of GRID 3 and GRID +0. Move the cursor to the left side of GRID 3 to select the location of the dimension line. End the command with the middle mouse button. 5. Snap again to the center point of the connection and then to the intersection of GRID 3 and GRID +13400, select the dimension line location and click the middle mouse button. 6. Select both dimensions (by holding down the Ctrl key), right-click and select Combine dimension lines on the pop-up menu. The separate dimension lines are now combined to one dimension line. Select the dimension line and move it to the correct location by dragging with the mouse. Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings
22
You should now have the vertical location of the diagonal brace connection shown in the GRID A view (see the figure below).
Create a cloud
To add a cloud and a note text to the GRID A view: 1. Click the Snap to any position icon on the Drawings: Snap settings toolbar.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings
23
2. Click the Draw cloud icon on the Drawings: Drawing toolbar.
3. Pick points for the cloud position around the diagonal bracing connection on gridline 3. End the selection with the middle mouse button.
Create a note text for the cloud
1. Select Properties > Text… to open the Text properties dialog box. 2. Select the standard settings from the option menu and click Load. 3. Change the text properties and frame as shown below and click Apply and OK.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings
24
4. Click the Create text with leader line icon in the Drawings: Drawing toolbar.
5. First, pick an edge of the cloud as the origin of the leader line and then another point to place the text. The GRID A view should now look like the figure shown below:
6. Select File > Close drawing and click Save in the Question dialog box.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings
25
10.6 Drawing Layouts Now we will have a brief introduction on how the Tekla Structures drawing layouts function. A drawing consists of the layout and drawing views, e.g. plans, side views, and section views. A layout connects a set of table layouts and a set of drawing sizes. Before you create a drawing, you must select a layout. The example below illustrates the relationship between the table layout and drawing views. The drawing views are blue, and the elements of table layout are red.
See the following links for more information about drawing layouts: Lesson 12 GA drawing Help: Drawing > Drawing layout
View contents of a drawing layout An example of a GA drawing layout for the A3 drawing sheet size is shown below. The drawing title and revision table included in this layout are also shown separately and enlarged.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings
26
Revision table:
Drawing title for GA drawings:
View GA drawing table layout
To view the contents of the GA drawing table layout in the Model Editor: 1. Select Properties > Layout… from the menu to open the Layout dialog box. 2. Select ga in the list of Layouts and click the Table layout… button to open the Table layouts dialog box.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings
27
3. Select ga in the list of Table layouts and click the Tables… button to open the Tables dialog box.
4. The content of the ga table layout is presented in the Chosen tables list.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings
28
5. Select the drawing_title_ga and revision table one at a time to view their location in the table layout. The former, for example, is bound by its lower right corner to the lower right corner of the drawing frame (that is the reference object).
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings
29
6. Click Cancel to close the dialog box.
Create a new layout We will use the existing ga layout as basis for creating a new layout for GA drawings. Create a new GA drawing layout
To create a new layout: 1. Open the Layout dialog box from the Properties menu. 2. Select ga from the list of Layouts and type a name for the new layout (as shown below) and click Add.
3. Select the newly created ga_new layout in the list and click Table layout… to open the Table layouts dialog box. 4. Select ga in the list of Table layouts and type a name for the new table layout (as shown below) and click Add.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings
30
5. Select the newly created ga_new table layout in the list and click Tables… to open the Tables dialog box. 6. Select drawing_title_ga, revision and tender_document one at a time in the Available tables list and add them (using the arrow button) to the Chosen tables list.
7. Set the location and click Update for each table separately (as shown below).
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings
31
8. Click OK to apply and close the Tables dialog box. 9. Click Update in the Table layouts dialog box to update the ga_new table layout and click OK to close the dialog box. 10. Click OK to close the Layout dialog box. The new layout settings were saved with the file name ga_new.lay to the ..\Basic Model 1\attributes folder. Define drawing sizes for the new layout
Before using the new layout, we need to define drawing size where it will be used. In Tekla Structures, you have two options how to set the drawing size. You can either: x
Specify exact sizes for drawings.
x
Let Tekla Structures find appropriate drawing sizes (according to the layout, tables in it, and the drawing view scales).
To define fixed drawing sizes: 1. Reopen the Layout dialog box from the Properties menu. 2. Select ga_new from the list of Layouts and click Fixed sizes…
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings
32
3. In the Fixed sizes dialog, type name ga_new_A3 for new size, define width and height for A3 size drawing (410 x 287), and click Add.
4. Select ga_new from Table layout pull-down menu and click Update. You have now defined ga_new_A3 size to use ga_new layout.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings
33
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for ga_new_A4, drawing size A4 (287x200). 6. Click OK to close the Fixed sizes dialog box. 7. Click OK to close the Layout dialog box. To define calculated drawing sizes: 1. Reopen the Layout dialog box from the Properties menu. 2. Select ga_new from the list of Layouts and click Calculated sizes…
3. Connect all sizes to ga_new layout by selecting ga_new from pull-down menu.
4. Click OK to close the Calculated sizes dialog box. 5. Click OK to close the Layout dialog box. Use the new GA drawing layout
To use the newly created GA drawing layout: 1. Open the drawing list and double-click on the G 1[ ]drawing to open it. 2. Open the General arrangement drawing properties dialog box and click on the Layout… button. 3. In the General – layout properties dialog box, click on the On/Off button to clear the checkboxes. Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings
34
4. Select the ga_new in the Layout and Table layout fields and click Modify.
5. Check that the drawing layout is changed correctly. The drawing title should be present in lower right corner of the drawing, the revision table and the note TENDER DOCUMENT is as shown below.
When the drawing is modified so that the whole drawing needs to be recreated, the drawing views are rearranged. As a result the views are placed differently thane they were before (see picture below). We will now rearrange them manually.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings
35
Move drawing views
To move drawing views: 1. Select the view frame of GRID 3. 2. Hold down the Shift key and drag the view with the mouse to the right side of the 3D view. 3. Move the GRID A view correspondingly Your G 1[ ]drawing should now look like the one shown below.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings
36
You can place drawing views more accurately by aligning them horizontally or vertically. For instructions, see Help: Drawing > Editing drawings > Working with drawing views > Aligning drawing views.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings
37
10.7 Plotting Drawings Tekla Structures plots drawings both to selected print devices and to files. Single drawings can be plotted from the Drawing Editor, and single or multiple drawings, which have been selected in the drawing list, can be plotted from the Model Editor.
Plotting Plot a single GA drawing
To plot a single GA drawing from the Drawing Editor: 1. Open the G 1[ ]drawing in the Drawing Editor. 2. Select File > Plot current… to open the Plot dialog box, or click the Plot icon on the Drawings: Standard toolbar.
3. Select the print device (plotter) to be used and click Print.
For more information about available plot options, see Help: Drawing > Printing > Plot options. Plot multiple GA drawings
To plot multiple GA drawings from the Model Editor: 1. Open the drawing list. 2. Select at least two GA drawings in the drawing list. 3. Click on the Plot icon on the Standard toolbar. Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings
38
4. Select the print device to be used and click Print. If you select several print devices, Tekla Structures sends each drawing to the device with the smallest paper size, on which the drawing will fit.
For more information about printing to print device, see Help: Drawing > Printing > Printing drawings.
Plotting to a file Plot a GA drawing as a dwg file
To plot the G 1[ ]drawing to a file: 1. Open the drawing list in the Model Editor. 2. Select the G 1[ ]drawing in the list. 3. Click on the Plot icon to open the Plot dialog box. 4. Select DWG as the plotting format in the Plotter list. Check that the Plot to file option is marked with a tick. 5. Type .\drawings in the plot file name field below the Plot to file option. This will define the ..\Basic Model 1\drawings folder as the destination folder of the plot files.
6. Click Print to plot the drawing to DWG. 7. Give a particular plot file name by typing, e.g., ..\drawings\SteelFrame.dwg in the plot file name field, and click Print. Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings
39
8. Check that the drawings were successfully plotted to the ..\Basic Model 1\drawings folder. This folder should contain the saved *.dwg drawings. If you do not enter a file name for the destination plot file, or you have chosen several drawings, Tekla Structures uses the drawing name(s) as file name(s). If you do not enter a folder name, Tekla Structures creates the file(s) in the current model folder. You can also print a drawing to DWG using the Drawing Editor. Open the selected drawing and follow the above steps, starting at step 3. Tekla Structures does not distinguish between upper and lower case letters. For example, a drawing named A.1 overwrites a drawing named a.1. For more information about plotting to file, see: Help: Drawing > Printing > Printing drawings > Printing to DWG/DXF Help: Drawing > Printing > Printing drawings to file
For more information about defining drawing plot file names and plot directories, see: Help: Drawing > Printing > Printing drawings to file > Switches for naming plotfiles
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings
40
10.8 Controlling Drawing Revisions Now we will cover the revision handling features of Tekla Structures. When the model changes: x
You have to update or revise drawings
x
Attach revision information to the drawings.
Tekla Structures displays the revision information alongside the revision number or the mark in the drawing list and in the revision table within the drawings. The revision table also shows the revision date. You can create a list of revisions in a report. For more information about drawing revisions and creating reports, see the following links: Help: Drawing > Getting started with drawings > Working with drawings > Defining drawing revisions Lesson 8 Numbering and reports
Create, modify and delete revision marks Create revision mark
To add a revision mark to the G 1[ ]drawing: 1. Modify the model by changing the profile of the columns on gridline 1 from HEA300 to HEA320. 2. Open the drawing list in the Model Editor. 3. Select the drawing to revise, right-click and select Revision… to open the Revision handling dialog box.
4. Enter the revision mark, revision date and description text of the revision in the dialog box as shown below, and click Create.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings
41
Once the revision is created, a revision number is automatically assigned to the drawing. The revision number is shown in the dialog box. 5. Check that the revision number is shown in the drawing list.
6. Open the drawing to check that the drawing title and revision table display the revision information correctly.
Several drawings can share the same revision mark, date, and information. To attach the same revision information to several drawings simultaneously, select multiple drawings from the drawing list.
You can choose whether Tekla Structures shows the revision numbers or the revision marks in the drawing list. By default, revision numbers are shown. For more information, see the following links: Help: Drawing > Getting started with drawings > Defining drawing revisions Help: System > Files and folders > Startup batch file.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings
42
Modify revision information
To modify the revision information of an existing revision mark: 1. First create a new revision to the G 1[ ]drawing by following steps 2-5 presented above: x
Change the model
x
Use B as the revision mark
x
Type revision date and description
x
Click Create
x
Leave the Revision handling dialog box open
2. Select the revision number 2 in the drop-down box next to the Mark field. The corresponding revision information is shown in the dialog box. 3. Change the revision mark to C, modify the description text, and click Modify. 4. Open the drawing to check that the modification is shown correctly in the revision table. Delete revision mark
To delete a revision mark: 1. Select the revision number 2 in the Revision handling dialog box. 2. Click Delete. 3. The updated revision number of the drawing is now 1. Check that the revision number is shown correctly in the drawing list. Open the drawing to check that the revision table is also updated. When you delete a revision, Tekla Structures automatically adjusts the remaining revision numbers for that drawing.
Show revision mark in plot file names When you plot drawings to files such as DWG, DXF or PDF, you can include the latest revision number or mark in the plot file name. In the Plot dialog box, select the checkbox of the Include revision mark to file name option as shown below.
Show revision information in a report The report drawing_issue_rev shows the revision dates and revision information of drawings. For more information about reports see Lesson 9 Numbering and Reports.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings
43
Show revision information in report
To create a report containing the revision information: 1. Click on the Report icon on the Standard toolbar to open the Report dialog box.
2. Select the drawing_issue_rev from the report list and click the Create from all button.
3. Click on the Show button to open the report. 4. Check that the revisions are shown correctly in the report drawing_issue_rev.xsr (Tekla Structures creates the report in the model folder). See the picture below as an example of the drawing_issue_rev report. Revisions made to the G 3[ ]drawing are marked with a red rectangle.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings
44
Create revision marks in drawings We will create revision marks in the drawings to help locate the changes made to the model.
For more information about creating revision marks in drawings, see Help: Drawing > Editing drawings > Editing drawings reference > Create>Revision mark. Define revision mark appearance
To create a revision mark in the G [1]drawing: 1. Select the G 1[ ]drawing in the drawing list and click on the Update marks button to update all marks. 2. Open the selected drawing and check that the part mark of the column on gridline 1 in the GRID A view has changed.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings
45
3. Select Properties > Revision mark… from the menu to open the Revision mark properties dialog box. 4. Select the revision number 1 in the drop-down box next to the Mark field to obtain the corresponding revision information.
5. On the Appearance tab, select the Arrow type as shown below, change the Frame color of the revision mark to red and click OK.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings
46
Create revision mark in GA drawing
1. Select Create > Revision mark > Arrow on right from the menu and pick a point to place the mark. For example, pick close to the column and its part mark on gridline 1 in the GRID A view. 2. Double-click on the revision mark to obtain its properties. Check that the contents of the revision mark is correct, and its appearance corresponds to the properties set in step5.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings
47
Assembly and Single Part Drawings
Tekla Structures 11.0 Basic Training May 18, 2005 Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
Contents
11
Assembly and Single Part Drawings ......................................................................... 3 11.1 11.2 11.3 11.4 11.5 11.6 11.7
Integration between Drawings and the Model............................................................................4 Create Drawings Using Drawing Wizards..................................................................................5 Edit Drawing Properties ...........................................................................................................13 Create a New Drawing Wizard ................................................................................................27 Edit Drawings Manually ...........................................................................................................33 Update Drawings .....................................................................................................................37 Create Drawings Manually.......................................................................................................41
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings
i
11
Assembly and Single Part Drawings
In this lesson
We will introduce the creation of assembly and single-part drawings in Tekla Structures. We will first create single-part and assembly drawings by using predefined drawing wizards (drawing wizards are an automatic way of creating single, assembly and multi-drawings). We will then edit the drawing properties and create a new drawing wizard. The Drawing Wizard will use the edited drawing properties and the select filters that we defined in an earlier lesson. Then we will show how the same drawings can be created manually. We will also demonstrate how updating effects the drawings. Revision control of all drawing types is presented in Lesson 10 Principles of working with drawings.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings
3
11.1 Integration between Drawings and the Model Assembly and single-part drawings Single-part drawings are workshop drawings of each of the individual steel parts in the model. Assembly drawings are workshop drawings, in which details of an assembly consisting of the steel parts are presented for fabrication. All of the views in single-part or assembly drawings are current views of the members as they are in the model. When the model contains any identical members, the drawing is a view of one of these members. The drawing, however, contains information about the quantity of all of the identical members. If the "host" member of the drawing is modified or deleted, it will get a new position mark at the next numbering. Tekla Structures will then automatically assign the original drawing to another member with the original position mark. Tekla Structures integrates the drawings and reports with the model. This means that, for example, dimensions and marks in the drawings are always correct. Because the information in the drawings and reports comes directly from the model, you cannot delete any of the parts or bolts from the drawings. You can, however, filter out parts and bolts in the drawings, or make them invisible. You can create drawings and reports at any stage of the project. If you change the model, Tekla Structures updates the related drawings the next time you perform numbering. For more information, see Help: Drawing > Introduction to drawings > Basics.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings
4
11.2
Create Drawings Using Drawing Wizards Once you have numbered the model, you can create assembly and single-part drawings from the model. Drawing wizards are the most effective way to create drawings in Tekla Structures. Wizards automatically produce different types of drawings of different parts, such as beams, columns, and braces. You can use wizards to create single-part, assembly, or multi-drawings using the settings defined in the wizard files. You can use the predefined wizard files, edit them, or create your own drawing wizards. The Wizard dialog box lists the available wizard files.
For more information on drawing wizards, see: Help: Drawing > Getting started with drawings > Creating drawings > Using drawing wizards Help: Drawing > Getting started with drawings > Drawing reference > File>Wizard…
Drawing wizards cannot be used to create General Arrangement (GA) drawings or cast unit (CU) drawings of concrete structures.
Functionality of drawing wizards For each member type in the model, drawing wizards automatically perform the following steps: 1. Define the drawing type to be created (single, assembly or multi) 2. Select the predefined drawing properties to be used 3. With the given select filter, select the parts from which to create drawings 4. Create drawings
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings
5
When you apply a wizard, you can choose whether the wizard creates drawings from all parts of the model, or just from the selected parts. By creating wizards that match the select filters and drawing properties in the project you can automatically create all single and assembly drawings of the parts using suitable predefined properties.
Preconditions of using a drawing wizard: x
Numbering of the model must be up to date
x
The appropriate wizard file must exist
x
The saved drawing properties listed in the wizard file must exist
x
The saved select filters listed in the wizard file must exist
x
Model members which will be selected by the select filter must exist
Create single-part drawings of selected parts We will now use a drawing wizard to create single-part drawings of selected steel beams and plates. Create single-part drawings of steel beams
1. Open the BasicModelCombined model. 2. Select the BEAM_STEEL filter from the drop-down list of available Select filters
3. Select the whole model with an area selection 4. To see the creation of the drawings, open the drawing list by clicking the Open drawing list icon.
5. Select File > Wizard… from the menu or click on the Wizard icon on the Standard toolbar to open the Wizard dialog box.
6. Select Single Drawings on the Wizards tab.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings
6
7. Click the Create from selected button. 8. In the drawing list check that single-part drawings with the title BEAM were created.
9. Open a few single-part drawings for viewing
You can view the next drawing on the list by clicking Next or using the shortcut Ctrl + Page Down
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings
7
Create single-part drawings from plates
Following the procedure above, now create single part drawings of all plates. 1. Select the PLATE select filter. 2. Select the whole model with an area selection. 3. Select Single Drawings on the Wizards tab in the wizard dialog box. 4. Click on the Create from selected button. 5. In the drawings list check that single-part drawings with the title PLATE were created. 6. Open a few single-part drawings for viewing
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings
8
Using the procedure outlined above, you could create single-part drawings from any other selected steel parts in the model (columns, braces, angles, etc.). It is advisable to create all the single and assembly drawings with the wizard, even for a single part. Tekla Structures displays a Cancel dialog box during the creation of drawings. Click OK in the dialog box to stop creating the drawings.
Create assembly drawings of all steel parts Next, we will create assembly drawings of all the steel parts by using another drawing wizard. To create all assembly drawings at once: Create assembly drawings
1. Define a select filter to filter away the concrete parts, click OK.
2. Drag an area through the whole model to select all the steel parts 3. Click on the Wizard icon to open the Wizard dialog box
4. Select Assembly Drawings on the Wizards tab Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings
9
5. Click Create from selected
Use the Create from all button to create drawings from the whole model at once.
6. In the drawings list check that the assembly drawings were created correctly (sort the drawing list by Title).
7. Open a few assembly drawings (which are not named STANDARD) for viewing
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings
10
For parts that don't match with the drawing properties or filters listed in the wizard file, the predefined wizards create drawings using STANDARD properties. Select parts with drawing title STANDARD
1. Select drawings with the title STANDARD in the drawing list. 2. Click the Filter - Select parts button
The parts associated with the selected drawings are now highlighted in the model. You will find, e.g., that objects that don't have a request in the default wizard are highlighted in the model. Open brace drawing
1. Select one vertical brace on gridline A. 2. Click the Display - All button to ensure that all drawings are shown in the list. 3. Click the Filter - By parts button.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings
11
The drawing list shows now only the assembly drawing created from the brace selected in the model. The brace drawing was created with bracing properties. 4. Open the drawing
A drawing wizard will not create a duplicate drawing for any member already having, e.g., a single-part or assembly drawing.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings
12
11.3
Edit Drawing Properties We will now define specific drawing properties for both horizontal and vertical bracing and save the properties to be used later in the drawing wizard. As an example we will open one vertical brace drawing for editing. Using this drawing we will save the properties for the horizontal bracing. We will then edit some more properties and save them for the vertical bracing. The editing actions we will do are just examples of using the drawing properties. The final drawing you get depends on the environment you are using and may not be identical to this example. Study the Online help for information on each of the separate fields available in the drawing properties. Help: Drawing > Dimensioning Help: Drawing > Drawing Properties
The drawings are created with the applied drawing properties (wizard applies the correct predefined properties automatically to parts). The quality of the automatically created drawings depends on the drawing properties used Whenever there is a need to edit the drawings, you should check if the result can be achieved by editing the drawing properties. As long as you can manage to create complete drawings by using predefined drawing properties the creation / updating of drawings will be automatic
Properties for horizontal bracing Load properties no_dimension
1. Right-click on the drawing and select Properties… to open the Assembly drawing properties 2. Load the predefined properties no_dimensions 3. Click Modify
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings
13
The drawing was regenerated with no_dimension properties. It appears now without any dimensions and only the main view is visible. By default, Tekla Structures creates the additional views only if it is necessary in order to show the dimensions in the drawing.
For our purposes, we want to have both the front and top views in the brace drawings regardless of the dimensions that may be needed. Display both front and top views
1. In the Assembly drawing properties dialog box click the View… button. 2. Choose the option on for the Front and Top views. 3. Click Modify and then OK
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings
14
Main part overall dimension
The first dimension we will add is the main part overall dimension. 1. In the Assembly drawing properties dialog box click Dimensioning… > Part dimensions. 2. Select Once for Main part overall dimensions. 3. Click Modify and then Apply
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings
15
The main part overall dimension appears. We will next add the dimension between the extreme bolts. Extreme bolts
1. On the Bolt dimensions tab select Assembly for Extreme bolts. 2. Click Modify and then Apply
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings
16
The distance between the extreme bolts appears. We then continue by dimensioning the main part cuts. Main part shape
To dimension the cuts in the main part: 1. On the Part dimensions tab turn Main part shape: to On 2. Click Modify and then Apply
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings
17
The dimensions of the cuts appear in absolute dimensions. This is due to the dimension type defined in the Assembly – Dimension properties tab. We will next change the dimension type to relative. Change dimension type from absolute to relative
1. In the Assembly drawing properties dialog box, click Dimension… 2. Change the Dimension types / In X direction to relative (see fig below).
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings
18
3. Click Modify and then OK
The dimensions of main part cuts now appear as relative dimensions.
By commenting environment variable, XS_NO_RELATIVE_SHAPE_DIMENSIONS, out the shape dimensions would always be relative despite the option chosen in the Dimension properties dialog box.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings
19
By editing dimension planes table You can define how Tekla Structures dimensions different profiles in drawings. For example, you can have Tekla Structures always dimension rectangular hollow sections to the middle of the profile or to the top. See Help: Drawing > Dimensioning > Dimension planes
An example of dimensioning according the prof. type 8 (=rectangular hollow sections) is set in dimension plane table by default so that Tekla Structures dimension sections to the middle of the profile 8,
-1.0, TRUE*, TRUE, TRUE,
TRUE*, TRUE, TRUE
To change Tekla Structures to dimension rectangular hollow sections to the left / top of the profile, set the dimensioning of prof. type 8 as shown below: 8,
-1.0, FALSE, TRUE*, TRUE,
FALSE, TRUE, TRUE*
Protection
You can protect areas in drawings to prevent text or dimensions being placed there. This way you can e.g. prevent the part mark (1014 in the fig. above) overlapping with the part. In cases where Tekla Structures can not find a free place for an object the objects will overlap with each others despite the switches in the protection dialog box. 1. In the Assembly drawing properties dialog box click Protection. 2. Select the checkboxes shown below. These options define that dimension lines may not overlap parts.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings
20
3. Click Modify and then Apply
We will now save the properties that we have applied so far for horizontal bracing. We will then continue to edit the drawing a little and save the properties for vertical bracing. Save as properties for bracing_H
1. Type bracing_H in the Name: field of Assembly drawing properties dialog box 2. Type bracing_H_TR in the Save as field, click the Save as button
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings
21
Properties for vertical bracing For vertical bracing we want to see the secondary part bolt internal dimensions and change the part mark frame a little as well as include the single part views of the plates. We will first add bolt dimensions to the vertical bracing. Secondary part bolt internal
1. On the Assembly - Dimensioning properties dialog, on the Bolt dimensions tab, select Internal for Secondary part bolt internal dimensions. 2. Click Modify and then Apply
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings
22
The bolt distance dimensions of the gusset plates appear.
Change the frame of part marks
We will next change the part mark frame to be rectangular. On the Assembly - part mark properties / General tab: 1. Change the Frame around mark to rectangular.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings
23
2. Click Modify and then Apply
The frames of part marks change to rectangular. Include single parts to the brace_V drawings
We will now include single-part views of the individual part components that form the assembly. 1. In the Assembly drawing properties dialog box, click Layout > Other. 2. Set Include single parts to Yes. This activates also the Single part attributes field allowing you to choose any predefined single part attributes.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings
24
3. Click Modify and then Apply
The single part views for plates appear. Tekla Structures has several environment variables to customize the single part presentation in assembly drawings. For example, you can choose to exclude some single-part views from assembly drawings. Help: System > Appendix A: Variables > List of variables > S > XS_SINGLE_EXCLUDE Or you can, for example, set the scale of single-part views included in assembly drawings. Help: System > Appendix A: Variables > List of variables > S > XS_SINGLE_SCALE Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings
25
Save as properties for bracing_V
We will now save the properties for vertical bracing 1. Type bracing_V in the Name: field of the Assembly drawing properties dialog box. 2. Type bracing_V_TR in the Save as field, click the Save as button
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings
26
11.4
Create a New Drawing Wizard We will next create a new assembly drawing wizard that matches the part properties and select filters defined in lesson 5. We will use the available drawing properties added with the bracing_H_TR and bracing_V_TR properties defined in this lesson. We start by creating properties for the parts not matching with the wizard requests We will then edit existing drawing requests to suit horizontal and vertical braces and use the new properties defined for them. We will delete all those requests that are not needed and finally edit a request for those parts that don't match our wizard to be shown as INCOMPLETE in the drawing list.
Create properties INCOMPLETE
1. Load standard drawing properties 2. Edit the Name: field to INCOMPLETE 3. Save the properties with the name INCOMPLETE
We will now use an existing wizard as the basis for constructing our own wizard. To create a new drawing wizard, we will perform the following steps: 1. Open an existing wizard file. 2. Save it with another name. 3. Modify the new file. 4. Test the functionality of the new wizard
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings
27
The following links present more information on customizing the wizard settings and the contents of a wizard file. Help: System > Files and folders > Customizing Tekla Structures > Creating wizard files Help: System > Files and folders > Log files > Wizard log
To create the new wizard file: Open existing wizard file
1. Click the Wizard icon to open the Wizard dialog box.
2. Select Assembly Drawings on the Wizards tab. 3. Click Edit to open the wizard file in a text editor
Save wizard file with another name
1. Select Save as… from the File menu of the text editor to save the wizard file with another name. 2. Browse to the attributes folder under your model folder, enter ASSEMBLY_TR.dproc as the file name and click Save. Note that the file extension has to be dproc. Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings
28
3. Check that the ASSEMBLY_TR.dproc file was created in the attributes subfolder by selecting Open model folder from the Tools menu The predefined wizard files are located in the folder ..\countries\*environment*\system. In the system folder, the wizard files are available for use in all models. Modified and saved wizard files are saved in the same folder, unless you define another destination folder (such as the model folder). Edit the wizard file 1.
Save and Reopen the model. To have the new wizard file shown in the Wizard dialog box, you need to close and reopen the model.
2. Open the Wizard dialog box. 3. Select ASSEMBLY_TR on the Wizards tab and click Edit. 4. Find the requests for chs bracings and shs bracings.
5. Edit the requests to match the criteria for vertical and horizontal bracing shown highlighted in yellow below.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings
29
Delete the extra requests
6. Delete all extra requests. Only keep the following: x
Beams
x
Vertical braces
x
Horizontal braces
x
Rafters
x
Purlins
x
Columns
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings
30
Change the remaining requests to use the select filters that we defined earlier, for this project. Change the select filters
7. Change the select filters defined for steel parts in this project: x
column_filter to COLUMN_STEEL
x
beam_filter to BEAM_STEEL
x
purlin_filter to PURLIN
x
etc.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings
31
Request for the rest of the assembly drawings
8. Edit the last request to be as shown: /* Create rest of assembly drawings */ set_drawing_type(assembly) set_drawing_attributes(INCOMPLETE) set_filter(standard) create_drawings()
Save the wizard file
9. Click Save to save the changes and to close the text editor
A wizard file is comprised of several sets of drawing requests. The order of these requests is important, since Tekla Structures creates only one drawing for each selected object. The first request that matches the criteria of select filters is applied. Now we want to ensure that the new wizard file functions correctly. Apply own wizard file
1. Delete all of the assembly drawings in the drawing list. 2. Open the Wizard dialog box, select the ASSEMBLY_TR wizard and click Create from all.
3. Check the drawing list to see that correct drawing properties were used: x
The titles of the created assembly drawings
x
INCOMPLETE
x
bracing_V, bracing_H
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings
32
11.5
Edit Drawings Manually It is easy to manually add, delete and edit drawing objects (i.e. dimensions, lines, text, symbols, graphics and marks) in Tekla Structures drawings.
Most drawing objects (both automatically and manually created) are associative and automatically update if the model changes. However some manually created drawing objects such as lines, polygons, and circles are yet not associative. We will now edit one brace_H drawing manually to include the same editing that we defined for the vertical brace_V drawing properties (the bolt distance dimensions the rectangular part mark frame, and single part views). Add bolt distance dimensions
1. Open the first bracing_H drawing in the drawing list 2. Click on the Create Y dimension icon
3. Pick the center points of bolts to be dimensioned 4. Move the cursor to where you want the dimension to appear and click on the middle mouse button
The associative symbols indicates which drawing objects are associated to the model and will be updated if the model is changed
Click SHIFT+A in the keyboard to display/hide the associative symbols
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings
33
To move the dimension: select it and drag it to the desired position
Add the bolt dimension to the other end in the same way. Change the frame of part marks
1. Double-click one of the part marks to open the Part mark properties dialog box. 2. On the General tab, change the Frame around mark to rectangular and tick only this check box. 3. Select all the part marks in the drawing. (You can use the Select part mark select switch.)
4. Modify
Now all the part marks in the drawing have rectangular frames. Include single part views
1. Using the CTRL key select each plate part in the drawing. 2. Right-click and select Create single part views from the popup menu.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings
34
3. Close the drawing, click Save and Freeze in the confirmation dialog box
When you close a drawing that has been changed, Tekla Structures prompts you to save the drawing. Whenever you have manually edited the drawing it is recommended to select Save and Freeze. This way you will systematically freeze edited drawings and only them. An F appears in the drawing list to show this drawing is frozen. Now this one horizontal brace drawing has roughly the same editing as all the vertical brace drawings. The difference is that part of this horizontal brace drawing editing was done manually. If we wanted the rest of the horizontal brace drawings to have the same editing, we could repeat the manual editing to them one by one. However, changing the bracing_H_TR drawing properties is a better solution.
To get the creation of drawings as automatic as possible, you should find good enough predefined drawing properties to create the drawings with, instead of editing them manually. Whenever there is a need to edit the drawings, you should
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings
35
first check if the result can be achieved by changing the drawing properties. As long as you can manage to create complete drawings by using predefined drawing properties the creation and updating off the drawings will be more automatic.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings
36
11.6 Update Drawings We will now modify our model by changing the bolt spacing of all of the gusset plate connections. Changes in the model will result in some of the drawings no longer be up-to-date. To be able to open the drawings you will need to run numbering and update them. We will study how updating effects the edited drawings. Updating will: x
Switch the P flag on a frozen drawing to an *. This indicates that the drawing has been updated (also manual editing, such as extra marks or dimensions).
x
Regenerate any drawings with a P flag that are unfrozen, with the originally used drawing properties. The updating deletes all the manual editing (added dimensions, texts etc.).
x
Update the quantities on a drawing with an N flag.
Change the model Change gusset plate bolt spacing
1. Select all the connections in the model. 2. Find the Tube gusset (20) connection (Ctrl+F), and double-click on it to open it. 3. Check that Ignore other types is selected in the connection dialog box. 4. On the Bracebolts1, Bracebolts2 and Bracebolts3 tab pages, edit the vertical bolt spacing to 80 as shown below.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings
37
5. Click Modify Now the model has changed and some of the drawings are no longer up to date. To be able to open the drawings you need to run numbering and update them.
It is not possible to open earlier revisions of the drawings. Due to the integration between drawings and the model a drawing that is not up-todate cannot be opened. Run numbering
Select Tools > Numbering > Modified. Once the numbering is carried out, the flags in the Drawing list show all those affected drawings that need to be updated. Help: Drawing > Getting started with drawings > Drawing status flags
You can filter up-to-date drawings with Filter > Up to date button. To get non up to date drawings listed press Display > Invert button after Filter > Up to date.
Update vertical brace drawings
The vertical brace drawings were created with only the predefined drawing attributes. They will be complete right after updating, since they are simply recreated using their own attributes. To update drawings: 1. Select all the bracing_V drawings from the list. 2. Click Update. 3. Open the drawings to see that they are ok
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings
38
Update horizontal brace drawing
We will next update all the horizontal brace drawings including the manually edited one. Before updating drawings Make sure that all the drawings having manual editing are Frozen. Updating will regenerate any drawings with a P flag that are unfrozen, the updating deletes all the manual editing (added dimensions, texts etc.). There is no Undo for the updating the drawings command. 1. Select all the bracing_H drawing from the list except the frozen one. 2. Click Update.
Because a lot of time can be spent editing drawings, it is advisable to always freeze manually edited drawings. If major modifications in the model create problems with a drawing you can always regenerate the drawing with the predefined drawing properties. To consciously override manual modifications in a drawing and regenerate the drawing with predefined drawing properties, you can: 3. Unfreeze the drawing. 4. Update the drawing Or in case the drawing is already up to date: 1. Unfreeze the drawing. 2. Modify it first, using other drawing properties (e.g. No_dimensions) 3. Modify it with the original properties (e.g. bracing_H) Since the drawing is not frozen, the updating regenerates the drawing but deletes all the manual editing (in this case the added bolt dimensions and part mark frame change).
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings
39
Update frozen horizontal brace drawing
To update frozen drawings: 1. Select the frozen bracing_H drawing from the list. 2. Click Update. 3. The P gets replaced by an *
Check and save the drawing
1. Open the drawing with an *. The dimensions should be correct.
2. Save the drawing, and the * flag is removed
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings
40
11.7 Create Drawings Manually In Tekla Structures, you can create single-part and assembly drawings by loading and applying predefined drawing properties for layout, dimensions, marks, etc. for selected parts. This process is called the manual creation of drawings, in contrast to the drawing creation with wizards. The steps for the manual creation of drawings are basically the same as the steps automatically dine by the drawing wizard: 1. Select the model objects. 2. Load and Apply the predefined drawing properties. 3. Click Drawing > Assembly drawing to create assembly drawings or Drawing > Single-part drawing to create single-part drawingsCreate
assembly
drawings As an example, we will create assembly drawings of the columns. To manually create assembly drawings of all columns: 1. Open the drawing list and delete all assembly drawings with the title COLUMN. Create assembly drawings from columns
2. Select the column_filter on the Select switches toolbar and select the whole model. 3. Select Properties > Assembly drawing… in the menu to open the Assembly drawing properties dialog box. 4. Select column properties in the drop-down box next to the Load button.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings
41
5. Click Load and OK. 6. Select Drawing > Assembly drawing in the menu to create the assembly drawings. 7. Open the drawing list and check that the correct drawings were created. You can also use the view filters in the View filter dialog box (opened from the View properties dialog box) to help selecting members in the model for drawing creation.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings
42
Cast Unit Drawings
Tekla Structures 11.0 Basic Training August 25, 2005 Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
Contents
11
Cast Unit Drawings...................................................................................................... 3 11.1 Create Cast Unit Drawings ........................................................................................................4 Define cast unit drawing properties for beams...........................................................................4 Create a cast unit drawing for a beam .....................................................................................10 Drawing Classifier in beam cast unit drawings ........................................................................11 Define Cast Unit Drawing Properties for Columns...................................................................15 Create Cast Unit Drawings for Columns ..................................................................................15 Create Additional Cast Unit Drawings......................................................................................17 Cloning Drawings ....................................................................................................................20
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Cast Unit Drawings
i
11
In this lesson
Cast Unit Drawings
In this lesson we will learn how to create cast unit drawings of the concrete members of the model. We will then modify the drawings and use the finished drawings for cloning. You will learn how to: x
Use your own select filters
x
Define cast unit drawing properties
x
Define Drawing Classifier settings
x
Use the Drawing Classifier
x
Use different drawings of the same cast unit
x
Use cloning
x
Use the drawing list.
Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation
T Cast Unit Drawings
3
11.1
Create Cast Unit Drawings Cast unit drawings are
workshop (or in-situ) drawings, in which details of a cast unit, consisting of the concrete parts, reinforcement and components, are presented for fabrication. All of the views in the drawings are current views of the members as they are in the model. When the model contains any identical members, the drawing is a view of one of these members. The drawing, however, contains information about the quantity of all of the identical members. If the "host" member of the drawing is modified or deleted, it will get a new position mark at the next numbering. Tekla Structures will then automatically assign the original drawing to another member with the original position mark. Tekla Structures integrates the drawings and reports with the model. This means that, for example, dimensions and marks in the drawings are always correct. Because the information in the drawings and reports comes directly from the model, you cannot delete any of the parts or bolts from the drawings. You are able to filter out parts and other objects in the drawings, or make them invisible. You can create drawings and reports at any stage of the project. If you change the model, Tekla Structures updates the related drawings when you next carry out numbering.
Once the model is numbered it is possible to create cast unit drawings of selected parts in the model. Selecting Cast Unit drawings from the Drawing pull-down menu will generate drawings of the selected parts. However, to get the drawings appear as complete as possible, it is a good idea to create drawings of certain cast units with suitable properties predefined for them. There are two options for cast unit drawing specification. The possible options to select are By cast unit position or By cast unit ID. See more in Tekla Structures Help: Drawing > Getting Started with Drawings > Creating drawings > Creating castunit drawings.
Define cast unit drawing properties for beams We will now define cast unit drawing properties for a beam, which has reinforcements included. Set the common drawing properties
1. From the pull-down menu select Properties > Cast unit drawing...
2. Select By cast unit position as the cast unit definition method.
Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation
T Cast Unit Drawings
4
3. Type BEAM REINFORCEMENT into the Name field. This text will appear in the drawing list. Set the layout properties
We will next define drawings size, layout and view projection. See more in Tekla Structures Help: Drawing > Drawing Layout > Drawing size and Drawing > Drawing Layout > Scale and location of drawing views > Location of views in drawings. Look also at lesson 10 for layouts. 4. Click on the Layout… button. 5. Select Size definition mode to be Autosize. 6. Select Calculated/fixed sizes in Autosize > Use option menu.
7. Select the Scale tab page. 8. Set Autoscale to No. 9. Select the Other tab page. 10. Select Projection type to be First angle (also referred to as European projection). 11. Set Yes to Side views beside main. 12. Enter the name Beam in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the settings. 13. Close the dialog by clicking OK. Set the view properties
Next we will define which views will be created to the drawing. See more in Tekla Structures Help: Drawing > Drawing Properties > Drawing view properties. 1. Click on the View… button.
Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation
T Cast Unit Drawings
5
2. Turn back and bottom views off, all other views to on or auto. 3. Select the Attributes tab. Set Scale to 1:20. All views of a view type share the same scale. 5. Set Coordinate system to local. 6. Set rotation to 0 in all directions. 7. Enter the name Beam in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the settings. 8. Close the dialog by clicking OK. Set the part properties
Next we will define how the parts will be presented in the drawing. See more in Tekla Structures Help: Drawing > Drawing Properties > Drawing view properties. 1. Click on the Part… button. 2. Set Part representation to Exact. 3. Set Hidden lines on and Center line and Reference lines off. 4. Select the Appearance tab. 5. For Visible lines, select color, which is weighted 0.3 mm. For all other lines, select line weight 0.1 mm.
Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation
T Cast Unit Drawings
6
Color weight is defined in plotter catalog: File > Catalog > Plotters > Modify… > Color table... See more in Tekla Structures Help: Drawing > Printing > The plotter catalog > Color. 6. Enter the name Beam in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the settings. 7. Close the dialog by clicking OK. Set the dimensioning properties
Next we will define how the parts will be dimensioned in the drawing. See more in Tekla Structures Help: Drawing > Dimensioning. 1. Click on the Dimensioning… button. 2. Set Number of views > Minimize and Combine dimensions > Options to No.
Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation
T Cast Unit Drawings
7
3. Select the Part dimensions tab page. 4. Set part dimensions as below:
5. Select the Position dimensions tab page. 6. Set Position to: to Main part. 7. Enter the name Beam in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the settings. 8. Close the dialog by clicking OK. Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation
T Cast Unit Drawings
8
Set the reinforcing properties
Next we will define how the reinforcements will be represented in the drawing. See more in Tekla Structures Help: Drawing > Drawing Properties > Reinforcement in drawings.
1. Click on the Reinforcement… button. 2. Set the Visibility of all reinforcing bars to Visible. 3. Set the Representation to single line. 4. Set the Visibility of reinforcing bars in group to all.
5. Select the Bar appearance tab page. 6. Select color, which is weighted 0.3 mm. Color weight is defined in plotter catalog: File > Catalog > Plotters >Modify…> Color table... See more in Tekla Structures Help: Drawing > Printing > The plotter catalog > Color. We will first present all reinforcements with the same color and modify it later. 7. Enter the name Beam in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the settings. 8. Close the dialog by clicking OK. 9. All other object can use standard settings. Now save these settings. Enter the name Beam-Reinforcement in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the settings. Apply all settings and close the dialog by clicking OK.
Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation
T Cast Unit Drawings
9
Create a cast unit drawing for a beam We will first create one cast unit drawing for a beam, which contains reinforcements, using the predefined attribute values. Then we will edit the settings and use them in new drawings for other beams with the help of Drawing Classifier. Create a cast unit drawing
1. Select a beam on gridline 7, between lines A and C.
2. Select Drawing > Cast unit drawing from the drop-down menu. A cast unit drawing is created of the selected beam using the predefined attribute values and it appears in the drawing list, which can be opened from Drawing > List… See
Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation
T Cast Unit Drawings
10
more about the drawing list in Tekla Structures Help: Drawing > Getting Started with Drawings > Opening drawings > Drawing list and Lesson 10.
Open the cast unit drawing for editing
Select the drawing from the list and click on the Open button. Tekla Structures opens the Beam reinforcement drawing for editing. You can edit drawings in the Drawing Editor on three levels: x
Drawing properties
x
View properties
x
Object properties
For more information about the drawing properties and different drawing levels, see Tekla Structures help: Help: Drawing > Introduction to drawings > Three levels of editing drawings Help: Drawing > Drawing Properties and Lesson 10.
Drawing Classifier in beam cast unit drawings Define Drawing Classifier settings We will use Drawing Classifier to represent the different reinforcements with different line settings. By default, all reinforcements use the same line settings and for clearer representation it is good to show different reinforcement with different line styles and weights. The Classifier makes use of the Drawing and View Filter, the Drawing and View Properties and Property Attribute sub-dialogs. See more in Tekla Structures Help: Drawing > Drawing Properties > The Drawing Classifier > Using the classifier.
To change properties of a single view of a multiple view drawing, edit and save View properties rather than Drawing properties. Once the properties have been set up and saved they can be applied in automatic drawing creation in normal ways. Create view filters
We will first define the filter settings for different reinforcements. Tekla Structures uses filters for selecting objects in drawing views with certain criteria. 1. Double-click on any view border to open the View properties dialog. 2. Click the Filter... button to open the View filter properties dialog box. 3. Select the Reinforcing bars tab page. 4. Type BOTTOM_BAR TOP_BAR in the Reinforcing bar Name field. Note that there is an empty space between the names to separate them.
Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation
T Cast Unit Drawings
11
5. Save the filter settings with name Main_Bars in the Save as field. 6. Write then PNL to the Reinforcing bar Name field. 7. Enter the name Lifting_Hooks in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the settings. 8. Next write STIRRUP to the Reinforcing bar Name field. 9. Enter the name Stirrups in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the settings. 10. Click Cancel to close the dialog box. Do not click Apply or OK, as this will apply the current filter to the entire drawing and the Classifier will not work. We have now defined three different filters for different kind of reinforcements. Define reinforcement appearance
Next, we will define the appearance settings for the reinforcements. 1. Click on the Reinforcement... button to open the View reinforcing bar properties dialog box. 2. Select the Bar appearance tab page. 3. Select color, which is weighted 0.5 mm (blue color). 4. Enter the name filter_Beam-Reinforcement_Main_Bars in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the property file for main bars. The name consists of three sections. First there must be the text "filter". Then the drawing or view attribute file name – in this case "Beam-Reinforcement" (the saved settings of drawing or view main dialog). The last section is the name of the filter attribute file – in this case "Main_Bars". The sections are combined with underscores. 5. Next select the Bar content tab page. 6. Select filled line as the Representation type.
Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation
T Cast Unit Drawings
12
7. Select straight line as symbol at reinforcement ends. 8. Enter the name filter_Beam-Reinforcement_Lifting_Hooks in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the property file for main bars. 9. Click Cancel to close the dialog box. We now have drawing classifier settings for main reinforcements and lifting hooks, stirrups can use Beam-Reinforcement settings. Define reinforcement mark content
Before modifying the drawing, we will add drawing classifier settings for pullout pictures of stirrup reinforcement marks. 1. Click on the Reinforcement marks… button to open the View reinforcing bar mark properties dialog box. 2. Select the Pullout picture from Available elements list on Single mark tab page.
3. Click on the Add> button. Pullout picture dialog opens. 4. Tick the Dimensions and Bending angle, then click OK. 5. Then, select Group above the Elements in mark list.
6. Repeat steps 2 – 4 to add the Pullout picture for reinforcement group mark. 7. Enter the name filter_Beam-Reinforcement_Stirrups in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the property file for stirrup reinforcements. 8. Then remove all elements from Elements in mark list. 9. Select Name from Available elements list and click on the Add> button. 10. Select Diameter from Available elements list and click on the Add> button. Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation
T Cast Unit Drawings
13
11. Enter the name filter_Beam-Reinforcement_Lifting_Hooks in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the property file for lifting hooks. 12. Click Cancel to close the dialog box.
Use Drawing Classifier to Edit the Drawing Now, all drawing classifier settings are ready for use. We will first modify the drawing which is already open. Modify the drawing
1. Close all view dialogs by clicking Cancel. 2. Double-click on any empty space to open the Cast unit drawing properties dialog. 3. Click Modify. Tekla Structures edits the picture using drawing classifier settings.
Main reinforcement bars are now represented with line weighted 0.5 mm, lifting hooks with filled line having name + diameter in the mark, and stirrups have a pullout picture in the mark. 4. Now, close the drawing saving it.
Use the Drawing Classifier to Create New Drawings Next we will create new drawings of rest of the concrete beams with the same Drawing Classifier settings. 1. Select Properties > Cast unit drawing… to open the Cast unit drawing properties dialog. 2. Select Beam_Reinforcement drawing settings from pull-down menu list. 3. Click on the Load button. Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation
T Cast Unit Drawings
14
4. Click OK to apply the settings and to close the dialog. 5. Select BEAM_CONCRETE select filter.
6. Make an area select of the whole model. All concrete beams will be selected. 7. Select Drawing > Cast unit drawing. Tekla Structures generates cast unit drawings of the selected beams using drawing classifier settings for reinforced beams and they appear in the drawing list with title BEAM REINFORCEMENT.
Define Cast Unit Drawing Properties for Columns Using the settings for beam cast unit drawing as basis, we will next define drawing settings for columns and generate cast unit drawings of them. 1. Select Properties > Cast unit drawing… from drop-down menu to open the Cast unit drawing properties dialog. 2. Select the Beam-Reinforcement from saved attributes list and click Load. 3. Change the name field to COLUMN REINFORCEMENT. 4. Enter the name Column-Reinforcement in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the settings. Set the dimensioning attributes
Next we add elevation dimensioning to the dimensioning settings. See more in Tekla Structures Help: Drawing > Dimensioning. 1. Click on the Dimensioning… button. 2. Select the Beam from saved attributes list and click Load. 3. Select the Position dimensions tab page. 4. Set the Elevation dimensions to On. 5. Enter the name Column-Reinforcement in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the settings. 6. Close the dialog by clicking OK. 7. All other objects can use standard or Beam-reinforcement settings. Now save these settings by clicking Save as in the main dialog. Apply all setting and close the dialog by clicking OK.
Create Cast Unit Drawings for Columns We will first create one cast unit drawing for a column which has reinforcements, using the predefined attribute values. Then we will modify the settings and use them in new drawings for other columns with help of the drawing classifier. 1. Select the column on grid intersection A7. 2. Select Drawing > Cast unit drawing from drop-down menu. A cast unit drawing is created of the selected column. Modify the Drawing Classifier settings
We will next modify the Drawing Classifier settings for columns: 1. Open the column cast unit drawing. 2. Double-click on any view border to open the View properties dialog box.
Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation
T Cast Unit Drawings
15
3. Open the Reinforcement properties dialog by clicking Reinforcement… 4. Select filter_Beam-Reinforcement_Main_Bars from pull-down list and click on the Load button. 5. Enter the name filter_Column-Reinforcement_Main_Bars in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the settings. 6. Then load the settings of filter_Beam-Reinforcement_Lifting_Hooks. 7. Enter the name filter_Column-Reinforcement_ Lifting_Hooks in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the settings. 8. Click Cancel to close the dialog box. We will next add part mark settings for column shoes. First we need to define the filter for components. 1. In View properties dialog, click Filter… 2. As all parts inside the components have class number 100, we can use that for filtering. Enter 100 into Class field on Parts tab page. 3. Enter the name component in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the settings. 4. Click Cancel to close the dialog box. Next we will define part mark settings for Drawing Classifier, using the component filter. 1. In the View properties dialog, click Part mark… 2. Remove all elements from Elements in mark list, both for main part and secondary part. 3. Enter the name filter_Column-Reinforcement_component in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the settings.
Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation
T Cast Unit Drawings
16
4. Click Cancel to close the dialog box. 5. Double-click on any empty space to open the Cast unit drawing properties dialog. 6. Click Modify. Tekla Structures edits the picture using drawing classifier settings. 7. Close the drawing and save it. Use Drawing Classifier to create new drawings
We will now create cast unit drawings for all concrete columns with the drawing classifier settings. 1. Select COLUMN_CONCRETE select filter. 2. Make an area select of the whole model. All concrete columns will be selected. 3. Select Drawing > Cast unit drawing. Tekla Structures generates cast unit drawings of the selected beams using drawing classifier settings for reinforced beams and they appear in the drawing list with title COLUMN REINFORCEMENT.
Create Additional Cast Unit Drawings You can create two or more cast unit drawings from the same cast unit. Drawing might be produced as three separate smaller size drawings i.e. One including main geometry + embeddings + dimension lines, one having Reinforcement, another Surface finishing (tiles etc.). Alternatively, you can add several new views from the same cast unit to an existing drawing using Create > View > Basic > Front, Up, Back or Down commands. Set the drawing attributes
First, we need to define the drawing settings. 1. Select Properties > Cast unit drawing… from drop-down menu to open the Cast unit drawing properties dialog. 2. Select the Column-Reinforcement from saved attributes list and click Load. 3. Change the name field to COLUMN DIMENSIONS.
4. Enter number 2 to the Sheet number field. Every additional cast unit drawing of the same cast unit must have a different sheet number.
Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation
T Cast Unit Drawings
17
5. Enter the name Column-Dimensions in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the settings. 6. Click on the Reinforcement… button. 7. Set the visibility of reinforcing bars to Not visible. 8. Enter the name Column-Dimensions in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the settings. 9. Close the dialog by clicking OK. 10. Now save these settings by clicking Save as in the main dialog. Apply all setting and close the dialog by clicking OK. Generate an additional cast unit drawing
We will now create a dimensioning drawing of one column. 1. Select a column on gridlines 1 and C intersection. 2. Select Drawing > Cast unit drawing from drop-down menu. A cast unit drawing is created of the selected column. The drawing appears in the drawing list with title COLUMN DIMENSIONS. The drawing name has a new sheet number.
Edit the additional cast unit drawing
We will next edit the dimensioning drawing and add there also details for connecting parts. For this create basic views of them by selecting part and right-click > Create view > Part basic views. 1. Open the cast unit drawing. 2. We will first add running dimensions for corbel. Double-click on the Create x dimension icon to open the dialog. 3. Select straight dimensioning to option, which has running dimensions. 4. On the Appearance tab select arrow shape to be filled arrow.
Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation
T Cast Unit Drawings
18
5. Click OK. 6. Click the corner points of the column and the corbel, end with middle button.
Next add part mark for bearing pad. 1. Select the bearing pad. 2. Right-click > Part mark. 3. Double-click on the part mark to open the Part mark properties dialog. 4. Remove all elements from Elements in mark list. 5. Add Name and Material to Elements in mark list. 6. Select the elements and click
7. Click Modify.
Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation
T Cast Unit Drawings
19
We will now add part basic views to the drawing to show the connecting structures. 1. In Create pulldown menu select View > From model > View. 2. Select the Part end view of the pad footing. Tekla Structures generates a new view to the drawing. 3. Right-click at any empty space and select Place views command. The views are rearranged in the drawing. 4. Remove unnecessary part marks from the view by selecting them and by clicking on the Delete button. 5. Double-click on the view border and select Part. 6. Set hidden lines visible and click Modify.
7. Add needed dimensions using dimensioning tools. 8. Close the drawing saving it.
Cloning Drawings We will next clone the additional cast unit drawing for columns on gridline F. You can clone drawings to produce cast unit drawings of same or similar cast units. You should consider cloning drawings when: 1. There are several almost similar parts or cast units in the model. 2. You need to produce several cast unit drawings of same cast unit. 3. The drawings need a lot of manual editing. See more about cloning in Tekla Structures Help: Drawing > Getting started with drawings > Drawing reference > Drawing>Clone drawing. Steps to clone drawings:
Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation
T Cast Unit Drawings
20
1. Finalize, save, and close the drawing you want to clone. 2. In the model, select cast units to include in the drawing. 3. Click Drawing > List... to open the drawing list. 4. Select the finalized drawing on the drawing list. 5. Click Clone...
6. In the Drawing cloning dialog box, select the drawing objects in the finalized drawing that you want to copy into the new drawing. If you want Tekla Structures to red circle the dimensions for which it cannot find a reference point on a part, select the Indicate dimension points that need checking checkbox. 7. Click Clone selected. Always check dimensions and drawing view sizes in cloned drawings.
You can have Tekla Structures to indicate the dimension points that need to be checked. Select the checkbox Indicate dimension points that need checking in the Drawing cloning dialog box. Tekla Structures circles in red the dimensions for which it cannot find a reference point on a part. To remove the red circles in cloned drawings, do one of the following: x
To remove one circle, in the Drawing Editor, click Edit > Remove dimension point select the circle to remove.
circle > Single circle and
x
To remove all circles, click Edit > Remove dimension point circle > All.
Create a new dimension point (Edit > Add dimension point) at the correct position and delete the existing dimension point (Edit > Remove dimension point). When you delete incorrect dimensions the red circles will also disappear. You can then recreate the dimensions.
Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation
T Cast Unit Drawings
21
In order to add and remove dimension points and to remove dimension point circles, you may have to adjust the drawing view size so that the dimension points are inside the view.
Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation
T Cast Unit Drawings
22
General Arrangement Drawings
Tekla Structures 11.0 Basic Training March 18, 2005 Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
Contents
12
General Arrangement (GA) Drawings........................................................................ 3 12.1 Creating GA Drawings ...............................................................................................................3 12.2 Editing GA Drawings................................................................................................................22 12.3 Updating GA Drawings ............................................................................................................27
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings
i
12 General Arrangement (GA) Drawings
In this lesson
We will look more closely at the features of general arrangement (GA) drawings in Tekla Structures. We will create GA drawings, modify and update them. We will also introduce tools for adding details and section views to the drawings. A general introduction to GA drawings and an example of creating GA drawings is presented in the Lesson 10 Principles of working with drawings. Also see the help file for more information Help: Drawing > Getting Started with Drawings > General arrangement drawings...
12.1 Creating GA Drawings We will now create general arrangement drawings from the following Basic Model 1-2 views: x
3D view
x
Elevation views from grids A, F, 1, 4, 7
x
Foundation plan
We will also add a few details to the GA drawing.
Adjust model views for GA drawings Before we start linking model views to the GA drawing, we need to review the views and, if necessary, modify or create new model views. Modify 3d view
1. Open the 3D view. 2. Double-click in the view background and click the Filter… button in the View properties dialog.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings
3
3. Filter out profiles D64*, P18*, 175* -> click Modify. (If you have a concrete frame, also set the display not to show reinforcements in the View setup dialog, which opens by clicking Display… in the View properties dialog.) 4. Rotate the 3D view to you liking (Ctrl + middle mouse button).
The 3D view will appear in the GA drawing in the same rotation angle as it is in the model view.
5. Close the view. 6. Check that other model views (grid A, F, 1, 4, 7 and plan 0) are displaying the necessary information: x
Filter unnecessary parts out.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings
4
x
Restrict work area to show only the part of the model you want visible (fit work area / pick work area).
x
Rotate 3D views to your liking.
x
Make sure that the plan and elevation views are in 2D mode.
E.g. Foundation plane (view Plan 0).
E.g. Elevation at gridline 4.
Create detail model views Create connection basic views
We can add any existing view to a GA drawing. We will now create detail views of two steel connections, or, in case you have modeled a concrete frame, of two concrete connections. Follow the corresponding instructions.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings
5
Detail views of steel connections:
Detail views of concrete connections:
1. Highlight the connection symbols at grid intersection A4 at the +13400 elevation.
1. Highlight the connection symbol at grid intersection A7 at the +7350 elevation.
2. Right-click and select: Create view > Component basic view.
2. Right-click and select: Create view > Component basic view.
3. Filter out all concrete parts from the view.
3. Filter out or hide the slabs. Use Shift+2 to show the connection in shaded wireframe, but the rest in rendered view.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings
6
4. Rotate the 3D view so that you get the best view of the connections.
4. Rotate the 3D view so that you get the best view of the connection.
5. Double-click on the background of the basic view and change the name of the view to (e.g. gridline location) Connection A/4 @ Roof level.
5. Double-click on the background of the basic view and change the name of the view to (e.g. gridline location) Connection A/7 @ level +7350.
6. Click Modify.
6. Click Modify.
7. The view title bar is changed according to the name (Connection A/4 @ Roof level). You should also see this view in the Open named view list.
7. The view title bar is changed according to the name (Connection A/7 @ level +7350). You should also see this view in the Open named view list.
Create a similar detail view from the connection at grid intersection B4 at the Roof level.
Create a similar detail view from the connection at grid intersection B7 at the same level.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings
7
Setup GA drawing properties Set drawing properties
Before we can start creating GA drawings we need to setup the drawing properties. See the online help files for more details. Help: Drawing > Getting started with Drawings > Drawing reference > General arrangement drawing...
1. Select Drawing > General arrangement drawing…
2. In the Create general arrangement drawing dialog box click Drawing properties…
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings
8
3. Change the following attributes for the 3D GA drawing: x
Change name to 3D (Name field)
x
View scale to 1:100 (View… button)
x
Turn off gridlines (Grid… button)
x
Turn off center lines (Part… button)
x
Turn off welds (Weld… button). If you have modeled a concrete frame, instead, turn off reinforcing bars (Reinforcement… button).
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings
9
4. Click OK in each child dialog box to lock the settings. And then click OK to in the main GA drawing properties dialog to lock all the settings.
Create a GA drawing from one model view We will create a general arrangement drawing from the 3D model view using the drawing properties set in a previous chapter. Create drawing out of 3D view
1. Select 3d view from the Create general arrangement drawing dialog.
2. Check-mark Open Drawing. 3. Click Create. In a few moments Tekla Structures opens a drawing created from the 3D view.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings
10
Create a GA drawing using more than one model view Now we will create another GA drawing using more than one model view and automatically bring those views into the GA drawing. Adjust drawing properties
1. Click the Drawing properties… button in the Create general arrangement drawing dialog, and change the following: x
Change the name to Elevation @ Grid 4 (Name field)
x
Change drawing size to 830*287 (Layout… dialog)
2. Click on OK for each of the dialogs to lock the settings. Create drawing out of Grid view and detail
To create GA drawing using more than one model view: 1. Highlight view GRID 4 and one of the two connection views you created earlier. 2. Select All selected views to one drawing. 3. Check mark Open drawing. 4. Click Create.
In a few moments Tekla Structures opens the GA drawing with the selected model views.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings
11
5. Double-click on the blue border of the main view. In the View properties dialog box, change the following: x
Turn on the gridlines (Grid… button)
x
Set the part marks visibility to distributed (Part mark… > General)
x
Turn off the part marks out of the view plane (Part mark… -> General)
6. Double-click on the blue border of the detail and change the following: x
Change the scale to 1:20 (Scale field)
x
Change the bolt mark visibility to distributed (Bolt part… -> General)
7. Close the drawing. If part or bolt mark visibility properties are set to something other than None and another view is added to drawing, all the deleted part marks will reappear.
Add another model view to an existing GA drawing We will now create another detail for the Grid 4 drawing using the same view properties as the existing detail. Link another model view to GA drawing
1. Open a model view at the second connection you created a view of (for steel frame connection at B/4 @ Roof level, for concrete frame B/7 @ level +7350). 2. Open GA drawing Elevation @ Grid 4. 3. Double-click on the Create view from model view icon to open the view properties.
4. Click Interrupt (right mouse click > Interrupt).
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings
12
5. Highlight the border of existing detail. 6. Click Get on View properties dialog. 7. Click OK. 8. Activate the Create view from model view command again by clicking the icon. 9. Minimize the drawing. 10. Pick the connection view. 11. Maximize the drawing and the detail will have appeared at the bottom left hand corner of the drawing. 12. Move the view from bottom left hand corner to a better location.
Create a detail from the drawing view Now we will create one more detail for the Grid 4 drawing, so keep the drawing open. Create another detail
1. Double-click on the Create view from view icon.
2. In the View properties dialog, change the scale to 1/20. 3. Click OK. 4. Select an area near the footing at gridline A as shown below.
5. The detail should now appear on the drawing. 6. Right-click and select Place views, or place the view manually.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings
13
7. Close the drawing. If the existing drawing view is in a 3D view, it is difficult to pick the area. Usually, it is easier to create another view in the model and link that model view to a drawing as explained earlier.
Create multiple GA drawings automatically Now we will create multiple general arrangement drawings automatically using grid views A, F, 1 and 4. Change drawing properties
1. Click the Drawing properties… button in the Create general arrangement drawing dialog and change the following: x
Change the name to Elevation @ Grid (Name field)
x
Turn on gridlines (Grid… button)
2. Click OK for each of the dialogs to lock the settings. Create GA drawings out of grid views
To create multiple GA drawings out of multiple model views: 1. Highlight views GRID A, GRID F, GRID 1 and GRID 7. 2. From the list box, select One drawing per view. 3. Click Create.
You will get 4 GA drawings. Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings
14
We still need to modify the GA drawing names. 1. Open the first drawing on the list.
2. Check the view title to see which gridline it represents. 3. Double-click on the background of the drawing to open the drawing properties. 4. Change the name to, e.g., Elevation @ Grid F.
5. Click Modify and the name changes on the list. 6. Repeat for the rest of the drawings.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings
15
Create an empty GA drawing and add model views interactively In certain situations (multi-user for example) it is necessary to first create empty GA drawings and later link the model views interactively. By using this method each user can have GA drawings reserved for their use. Change drawing properties
1. Click the Drawing properties… button on the Create general arrangement drawing dialog, and change the following: x
Change the name to Foundation (Name field)
x
Change the drawing size to 830*584 (Layout… dialog)
x
Set the part marks visibility to none (Part mark… -> General)
x
Set the part marks out of view plane not visible(Part mark… -> General)
2. Click the OK button for each of the dialogs to lock the settings. Create empty GA drawing
To create an empty GA drawing and add the model view interactively: 1. Open the model view, Plan +0. 2. Open the GA drawing creation dialog, Drawing > Create general arrangement drawing. 3. Select Empty drawing from the drop down menu. 4. Check-mark Open drawing. 5. Click Create.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings
16
Link model view to drawing
1. Open the drawing. 2. Minimize the drawing. 3. Double-click on the Create view from model view icon.
4. Change the scale to 1/100. 5. Click OK.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings
17
6. Pick the model view. 7. Maximize the drawing and the model view has been placed on the drawing. 8. Right-click and select Place views.
Create a detail using area select We will now create detail from the footing at A/1.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings
18
Create detail
1. Minimize the drawing again. 2. Double-click on the icon Create view from model by area.
3. Change scale to 1/20. 4. Click OK. 5. Pick area around the footing at grid intersection A/1.
6. Maximize the drawing and the view will have been placed on the drawing. 7. Right-click and select Place views.
Create a section view out of a detail Now we will create section view from the footing detail that we created earlier. Create section view
1. Double-click on the icon Create section view.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings
19
2. Change scale to 1/20 in the view properties dialog. 3. Click OK. 4. Pick the section view area as shown below: x x
With points 1 and 2 you will show the location and direction of the cut line. Then with points 3 and 4 you will show the depth and width of the section view, so a pick box which is big enough that all of the necessary parts fit inside.
The section view and cut symbols will appear.
The section view height is same as model height.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings
20
1. Double-click on the section view blue border. 2. Change the height by changing the y max: value from 13400 to 500.
3. Click Modify. 4. Left-click the background of the drawing once and then right-click and select Place views.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings
21
12.2 Editing GA Drawings Next we will do some editing to the GA drawings. Most of the editing is done exactly like it is done in other types of drawings see: Help: Drawing > Editing Drawings.
Interactive dimensioning For more information about the different dimensioning tools, see: Help: Drawing > Dimensioning > Dimension basics > Manual dimensioning.
Automatic grid dimensions Grids can be dimensioned with just a couple of clicks: Dimension grids
1. Open the Foundation GA drawing. 2. Go to Create > Dimension > Grid.
3. Pick the main drawing view. 4. Grid dimensions will appear. 5. You can pick and move dimension lines anywhere you want them.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings
22
Semi-automatic GA dimensioning See the online help file for more information about setting up dimensioning properties Help: Drawings > Dimensioning > Dimension reference > Setup>GA dimensioning. Dimension silos
1. From the menu, select Setup > GA dimensioning… 2. Set the properties as shown below:
3. Select the silos.
4. Right-click and select Dimension Parts XY.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings
23
5. Dimension lines from the silos to gridlines appear.
In the same fashion we can also dimension the anchor bolts: Dimension anchor bolt detail
1. Highlight the parts in the anchor bolt detail. 2. Right-click and select Dimension Parts XY.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings
24
And in the section view: Dimension anchor bolt cut view
3. Double-click on the blue border to open the view properties. 4. Click on the Part… button, check-mark Hidden lines: to on and click Modify. 5. Highlight just the anchor bolts and the footing. 6. Right-click and select Dimension Parts XY.
7. Close the drawing.
Create a level mark A level mark can be inserted at any picked point in the drawing and it will automatically give you the elevation of that point. Create level mark
1. Click the Create level mark icon.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings
25
2. Right-click and use the Near snap override to pick a point at the top of the foundation. 3. Freely pick another point to set the direction of the level mark. 4. The level mark will appear at the selected location.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings
26
12.3 Updating GA Drawings GA drawings are automatically updated when you make changes to the model. However, GA drawing marks are not automatically updated. You need to update these by pressing the Update marks button in the drawing list before opening the drawing.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings
27
Project Manager
Tekla Structures 11.0 Basic Training August 16, 2005 Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
Contents
Contents..................................................................................................................................i
1
Project Manager ...........................................................................................................3 1.1 1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5 1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
About Tekla Structures Project Manager...................................................................................4 Working with Views ...................................................................................................................5 Open the model.........................................................................................................................5 Open the view list ......................................................................................................................6 Create plane views along gridlines ............................................................................................7 Create a true plan view..............................................................................................................9 Examine the Model..................................................................................................................12 Zooming and rotating...............................................................................................................12 Displaying and hiding objects in the view ................................................................................13 Using and defining select filters...............................................................................................14 Check objects by phases.........................................................................................................17 Lotting and Sequencer ............................................................................................................19 Lotting......................................................................................................................................19 Sequencer ...............................................................................................................................22 Attributes and Attribute Import.................................................................................................24 4D Tool....................................................................................................................................28 Select parts from model using reports .....................................................................................29 Export updated dates ..............................................................................................................31 The 4D dialog ..........................................................................................................................31 How to Show your Model to Others.........................................................................................33 Taking snapshots ....................................................................................................................33 Publishing the model as a web page .......................................................................................36 Reports....................................................................................................................................38 Study different reports and check part marks ..........................................................................41 Create reports .........................................................................................................................42 Other checks ...........................................................................................................................42 Drawings .................................................................................................................................43
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager
i
1
In this lesson
Project Manager
In this lesson we will go through the basic functionalities of Tekla Structures Project Manager. We will open a model and examine it in different ways. We will also learn how to use the 4D tool in different ways. Then we will import attributes, learn to use the 4D tool and learn to make some reports. In the first section, we will briefly discuss some of the ways to utilize Tekla Structures Project Manager to give you an idea of the possibilities there are. In this lesson, you will learn how to: x
Create views
x
Examine the model
x
Create lots and sequences
x
Import attributes
x
Use the 4D tool
x
Create your own reports
x
Check drawings.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager
3
1.1 About Tekla Structures Project Manager What is Project Manager?
What is Project Manager? For whom is it intended? What are the benefits? Tekla Structures Project Manager is add-on software of Tekla Structures to followup the status of the project and review changes that have occurred during a project. It is a means to ensure that the information flow is efficient, both if your company is alone on the project or if there are multiple companies involved. In Tekla Structures Project Manager, you can contain the follow-up information for the total structural engineering project from conceptual design to fabrication and erection. In case there is one company involved, it might be the drawing office manager, the fabrication manager, and the account manager who use the program. In case there are several companies involved, it could be the owners, the customers, the fabrication managers, the chief engineers, the project managers, and the drawing office managers who use the program.
What do you use Project Manager for?
What do you use Project Manager for? How do you manage your project with Project Manager? x
The project manager can assign parts of the project to different persons or to other organizations and then follow-up and update the status.
x
You can add project data to the structural objects or groups of objects.
x
You can follow-up your project visually: you can view different parts in your model by highlighting according to certain criteria or status.
x
You can make reports based on the project status, parties involved, dates, etc.
x
You can publish your project model on the Web to other parties.
x
You can share your model by collaboration: multi-user, share your model.
x
You can do status tracking, scheduling, task assignments, visualization, reporting of structure.
x
You can view and check drawings.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager
4
1.2 Working with Views In Tekla Structures, you work in views. Each view has properties which define its appearance. In this section, we will learn to open the model to use the view list and to create some new views.
Open the model Open the model Lesson_PM. Open a model
1. Select File > Open… from the pull-down menu or click the Open icon in the Standard toolbar to open the Open model dialog box.
2. In the Model directories list, select Lesson_PM.
3. Click the OK button to open the model.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager
5
Open the view list You look at the model in different views. If there are already views created in your model, you can find them by clicking the Open named view list icon: Open the view list
1. Click on the Open named view list icon.
The Views dialog box opens.
This list contains all the created views. All invisible named views are listed on the left, and all visible views on the right.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager
6
If the list is empty, you must create your own elevation and plan views.
Create plane views along gridlines We will now learn to create Elevation and Plan views along the grid lines created in the previous section. A view is a representation of a model from a specific location. Each view is displayed in its own window inside the Tekla Structures window. Each view has a view plane on which the grids are visible and points are represented as yellow crosses. Points outside the view plane appear as red dots. For more information, see: Help: Modeling > Getting started > Views. Create grid views
To create views along grid lines, 1. Select one gridline. 2. Right-click and select Create view > Grid views from the pop-up menu to open the Creation of views along grid lines dialog box.
3. Click the Show… button of the XY view plane to open the View properties dialog box. 4. Change the Angle and View depth values as shown below and click OK to close the dialog box.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager
7
5. Select the number of views as All and click Create in the Creation of views along grid lines dialog box. The Views dialog box appears presenting all the created views. All invisible named views are listed on the left, and all visible views on the right.
For more information on view properties, see: Help: Modeling > Getting started > Views > View properties Display or hide views
To display or hide views: 1. Click the Open named view list icon to open the Views dialog box (which is now already open). Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager
8
2. Select one or several views you want to display or hide. To select several views, use Ctrl and Shift keys. 3. Use the arrows to move views from left to right (visible) or vice versa (invisible).
Do not keep too many views open at the same time. Nine is the maximum number of open views. You can open or close named views by clicking the Open named view list icon. Delete unnecessary views from the view list. To switch between views, press Ctrl+Tab.
Create a true plan view Often, we need to create other views than grid views. In addition to creating grid views, we can create x
views with two points or with three points,
x
part or component basic views, or
x
views to part planes: either top, front, back or bottom.
Let's create a view that is parallel to the roof slope by creating a view to the top or the rafter on gridline 1. 1. Select View > Create view > To part plane > Top.
2. Select the rafter on gridline 1.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager
9
The new view appears.
3. Double-click on the background. 4. Define the name TRUE PLAN_ROOF for the new view, change the view depth and click Modify.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager
10
The new view appears on the view list.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager
11
1.3 Examine the Model Zooming and rotating You can zoom in and out in several ways. You can click the Page Up or Page Down keys or, if you have a wheel mouse, scroll the mouse wheel forward to zoom in, and backward to zoom out. Practice zooming
1. Press the Page Up and Page Down keys to see how the zooming works. 2. If you have a wheel mouse: Scroll the mouse wheel forward to zoom in. Scroll the mouse wheel backward to zoom out.
Rotate the model
You can rotate the model in a 3D view with rendered view type. 1. Hold down the Ctrl key, and click and drag with the middle mouse button. 2. To change the center of rotation, press the key v. 3. In the view, pick a center of rotation. 4. Again, hold down the Ctrl key, and click and drag with the middle mouse button.
Change between 3D / Plane
With the shortcut Ctrl+P you can change the view angle between 3D and Plane, which is very useful.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager
12
Displaying and hiding objects in the view Object representation
To define which objects are visible and how they are displayed in a view: 1. Double-click on the view. 2. In the View properties dialog box, click Display... . The View setup dialog box appears. 3. Set the visibility and representation for different objects and for components. Try, for example, to hide cuts, fittings and component symbols.
4. Click Modify.
Filtering objects
To more precisely define which objects are displayed in a view, use the view filter. In the View filter dialog box you can define the visible objects in the view according to their properties. To filter out all concrete parts from the view: 1. Double-click the view. 2. In the View properties dialog box, click Filter... . 3. In the View filter dialog box, select the Parts tab, check Material, also the not box, and write K* in the Filter string field.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager
13
4. Click Modify.
Using and defining select filters Tekla Structures includes some select filters, such as beam filter, column filter and plate filter. You can, however, easily create your own select filters, too (see below). Use select filter to hide parts
1. Select the select filter called beam_filter on the select filter list.
2. Make an area selection by dragging the mouse, selecting the whole model. The beams become highlighted. 3. Right-click and select hide. All beams are hidden.
To display hidden objects again, select the view (the view is selected when it is blue), right-click anywhere on the blue background and select Redraw window!
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager
14
Define your own select filters To make the selecting of parts easier, we will define select filters for each part type. We will use the name of the part as the filtering criteria. This name is the one that is defined in the Properties dialogs of the parts, see below.
To view the Properties dialog of an object, select the object, right-click and select Properties… .
For steel/concrete beams and columns we will add also the material as the filtering criteria to be able to filter them separately. Help: Modeling > Settings and tools > Filter > Select filter Define select filter for footing
1. Click the Display select filter dialog icon to open the Select filter dialog box.
2. Load the standard filter to turn out all the possible filtering. 3. Enter name FOOTING in the Name field of Parts tab. 4. Enter name FOOTING in the Save as field and click Save as. You can now choose the new filter from the drop down list.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager
15
By following the procedure above define select filters for:
Define Select filter for plates
x
Slabs
x
Hollowcore slabs
x
Silos
To define select filters for plates created both manually and by the connections: 1. Enter name *PLATE* in the Name field of Parts tab. (*PLATE* matches all parts of which name includes word PLATE)
2. Enter name PLATE in the Save as field and click Save as Define Select filter for steel beams
To define select filters for Steel Beams: 3. Enter the name BEAM in the Name field of Parts tab. 4. Enter S* in the Material field of Parts tab. (S* matches all materials with a material name that begins with the characters S)
5. Enter name BEAM_STEEL in the Save as field and click Save as. By following the procedure above define select filters for: x
Concrete beams
x
Steel columns
x
Concrete columns
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager
16
Save the model
Finally save the model.
Check objects by phases In Tekla Structures, phases are used to break up a model into different sections. Phases are often used to indicate erection sequences. You can create reports and views, hide objects, and copy objects from other models, according to their phase number. Check objects by phases
1. Select Setup > Phase manager... to open the Phase manager dialog box. In our model, there are two different phases. We have named the phases Model1 and Model2.
2. Select Model1. 3. Click Objects by phases.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager
17
The objects that belong to the selected phase become highlighted. Check phases by objects
1. Select any part in the model. 2. Click Phases by objects. The phase to which the selected part belongs becomes active on the Phase manager dialog. 3.
Repeat steps 1 and 2 several times selecting different parts, and by dragging an area selection containing several parts.
Help: Modeling > Settings and tools > Settings > Phases
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager
18
1.4 Lotting and Sequencer Lotting With lots you can group assemblies e.g. for transporting to site. The lotting tool can be used as a help when planning loading schemes. The lotting function keeps track of the weight and the number of assemblies of each lot, but not the physical size of the assemblies, such as the length of a beam. We will create some lots according to the following loading capacities:
Create lots
Lot 1
17000 kg
Lot 2
20000 kg
Lot 3
20000 kg
Lot 4
20000 kg
Lot 5
18000 kg
1. Click Tools > Lotting… . The Lotting dialog box opens.
2. Click Properties… . The Lot properties dialog box opens. 3. Give the lot you are to create the name "First lot", the number "1" and the maximum weight 17000, and click Add.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager
19
4. Create the rest of the lots by repeating step 3 for each lot with the information in the table above. Then click OK. 5. On the Lotting dialog box, select "1 First lot" on the list. In the model, select the columns on gridlines A and B holding down the Ctrl key. Then click Apply selected. 6. Assign the hollow-core slabs on the first floor between gridlines 4 and 5 to the second lot in the same way.
7. While selecting the slabs, check the Weight and Weight left values in the dialog. If they exceed the maximum weight of the lot, unselect the last slab.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager
20
8. Then, select the third lot on the list. In the model, continue selecting the hollowcore slabs on the first floor until the lot is full, click Apply selected. 9. Repeat for the fourth lot. 10. For the fifth lot, select as many concrete beams as the lot allows.
If you do assign too much weight to a lot, Tekla Structures gives the following message:
You can either choose to continue, or correct the situation, by selecting Cancel. Now, when you select different lots in the Lotting dialog box, the parts belonging to each lot are highlighted in the model. Click OK.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager
21
Sequencer The sequencer is used, for example, for naming sequences and defining the order in which to erect members. For example, the columns of a steel frame can have a certain sequence. One part can belong to several sequences. Create sequences
1. Click Tools > Sequencer… . The Sequencer properties dialog box opens. 2. Type "Steel columns" as the sequence name.
3. Click Apply. 4. In the model, pick the steel columns on gridline A, one by one, starting from gridline 1, continuing with those on gridline B. (Tip: Apply the select filter for steel columns to make picking the right parts easier.) End the picking with Interrupt or the Esc key. In the dialog, the number 14 now appears in the Max number field. 5. Type a new name "Concrete columns" in the Sequence name field. 6. Click Apply. 7. In the model, pick the concrete columns on gridlines C, D, E and F, one by one, starting from gridline 1. (Tip: Use the select filter for concrete columns.) Again, end the picking with Interrupt or the Esc key. 8. In the same way, define a sequence called "Hollow-core slabs floor 1" for the hollow-core slabs on level +3850.
You can't add a new part to a sequence, unless the new part is at the end of the sequence. If the sequence changes, you must redefine that whole sequence. Check the sequence number
You can check the name and number of a sequence using the Inquire object command.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager
22
To check the name and number of a sequence using the Inquire object command, the sequence name must appear as a user-defined attribute in the objects.inp file. Objects.inp can be edited. (Example?)
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager
23
1.5 Attributes and Attribute Import You can see the attributes of any part by double-clicking it. Check the attributes of a part
1. Double-click on one of the concrete columns in the model. A dialog called Tekla Structures Concrete column (1) opens. 2. Select the Status tab. You can see that there is no information here. 3. Close the dialog with OK. Now, let's input some information about the status of parts.
Define attributes via dialog
1. Activate the select filter COLUMN_CONCRETE.
2. Select all concrete columns in the model. 3. Holding down the Ctrl key, double-click on one of the highlighted columns to open the attributes dialog. 4. Select the Status tab. Fill in some information about the columns, see an example below.
5. Click Modify.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager
24
However, there is a more efficient way of getting the attributes into your model. We can import the data as a file. This way, the persons at the building site, for example, can write such information as actual erection dates in an Excel sheet, which can be imported into the model in text file format. We will first need a csv format (= comma separated value) report file. In this example, we will use the report template Erection_planned_actual.csv.rpt. Import attributes with txt file
1. Open the Report list and run the report Erection_planned_actual.csv from the whole model.
2. Open your model folder (Tools > Open model folder), and double-click on the csv file (Erection_planned_actual.csv) to open it in Microsoft Excel. It is located in the Reports folder. 3. Input actual erection dates for all parts of the model. Also write some text in the erection comment fields.
4. Save the file as a tab-delimited text file - Text (Tab delimited (*.txt)), and shorten the name to Erection_plan_act.csv.
5. Close the file. 6. Select File > Import > Attributes… . 7. In the Import Attribute dialog, browse with the (…) button to select the input file (Erection_plan_act.txt). 8. Select the alternatives shown below, click Create.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager
25
The file path of the input text file can contain a maximum of 79 characters, which is why we shortened the file name of the text file. If the import doesn't work, try to shorten folder names or file names.
The attributes that you added in the Excel spreadsheet are now imported into your model. To see the Erection comment field on the attributes dialog, we need to edit objects.inp file a little (we added the text INSTALL_COMMENT). Also, the file import_macro_data_types.dat must be edited. In the examples, the edited objects.inp and import_macro_data_types.dat files are assumed to be in use. Check the attributes
Now, let's check that the attributes were imported correctly! 1. Double-click on any part. 2. Select the Status tab. 3.
Check the Actual Erection Date and Erection comment fields.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager
26
(More on this?)
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager
27
1.6 4D Tool With the 4D tool (Tools > 4D… ), we can visualize different attributes of our model objects on the time scale. Among other things, we can visualize the progress of the erection of a building. Let's do this, using the actual erection dates that we have just imported into our model. Visualize the actual erection
1. Select Tools > 4D… to open the 4D dialog. 2. Select the attribute you want to look at in the Action list, in this case Actual Erection Date. 3. Set the current date, it can be the first day of the period you want to look at. 4. Set the step to One day forward. (If the actual erection dates you defined in the import file span over months instead of days, select One week forward or 30 days forward!) 5. Set start and end dates for the period during which the actual erection takes place. 6. Select Coloring in the Visualisation drop-down menu.
Part in the model that have the current date that is shown on the dialog, are shown in green color, others in red. 7. Click Step. For each step, the parts with the current actual erection date become green.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager
28
Select parts from model using reports We will first create a report of all parts that are visible in the 4D tool window to be able to select parts based on it. Create a report
1. Set Reporting to Full. 2. In the Template list, select the report template 4D_ID_SELECT_steel.rpt. 3. Click the Refresh button to show the report.
A list of the parts in the 4D view is displayed. The list updates automatically if you change the date by clicking the Step button. Now, let's select some parts and change their actual erection dates with the help of the report. Change dates of parts
1. Select a line in the report.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager
29
2. The corresponding part is selected in the model. 3. Right-click and click User-defined attributes… . The attributes dialog opens. 4. Select the Status tab. 5. Select a date from the calendar.
6. Click Modify to assign the date to the selected part. 7. Select other parts that you want to assign the same date to, and click Modify again. 8. In the 4D dialog, click the Refresh button to update the report.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager
30
Export updated dates Now, we will export the changed data using the Erection_planned_actual.csv.rpt report. 1. Select those lines that you changed the erection date for in the 4D_ID_SELECT_steel list. Now, all the objects that you changed the erection date for are selected. 2. Click the Report icon to open the list of reports.
3. Select Erection_planned_actual.csv on the list. 4. Edit the name of the report file to something else, otherwise Tekla Structures will replace the previous file with the new one. 5. Click on the Create from selected button on the Report dialog.
The report file is created into the model folder and can be opened in Microsoft Excel, to be edited further, if you wish, and imported back to the model.
The 4D dialog On the 4D dialog, we can select different actions, which are attributes of the objects, as well as different steps and different ways to visualize.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager
31
Action
The above date attributes are included by default. If an attribute on the list has input on the attribute dialogs, it can be selected as a 4D action.
Step
For the step pace, there are also several alternatives: one day, one week, or 30 days, and forward or backward. Visualization
There are several different possibilities for visualization.
If you select Coloring – Incremental, in our case, the parts erected at the current date will be shown in green color, the parts not yet erected will be shown in red color, and the parts erected before the current date will be shown in grey color. If you want to check which parts do not yet have an actual erection date, you can use the Show objects that do not have a date alternative. You can also choose to show objects that have a date earlier, or later, than the current date.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager
32
1.7 How to Show your Model to Others Taking snapshots Tekla Structures has a tool for taking snapshots of your model view: Window > Snapshot. You can also use the PrintScreen key on your keyboard, or any separate snapshot program, such as HyperSnap. Let's take a snapshot. Take a snapshot
1. Select Window > Snapshot > Snapshot (view without borders). A message "Snapshot taken ()" is shown on the status bar at the bottom of the Tekla Structures window. 2. Select Tools > Open model folder. 3. Find the file snap_001.bmp, double-click on the filename to view the picture. Let's send a picture of a footing baseplate to the site. This time we want our picture to have a white background. We will also highlight a detail in the picture.
Take a snapshot with white background
1. Select the footing connection at the footing on gridline intersection C-7. 2. Right-click and select Create view > Component basic view. 3. Change the component view to shaded wireframe (use the shortcut Ctrl + 2). 4. Select Window > Snapshot > Snapshot….
5. In the Snapshot dialog, click Options… . 6. In the Snapshot options dialog, select White background, and click OK.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager
33
7. In the Snapshot dialog, tick the alternative Print to file and click Browse… . 8. Define a file name, for example Footing_whitebackground, and click OK.
9. Click Capture. 10. Select Tools > Open model folder. 11. Find the file Footing_whitebackground, and open it to check it. Edit the picture
12. Close the file, and reopen it in a picture editor by right-clicking on it and selecting Open With > Paint (or another picture editor). 13. Add a red circle to emphasize a detail in the picture and a text, for example as below!
14. Close the picture editor and save the picture. 15. Select the picture filename, right-click on it and select Send To > Mail recipient.
16. Type the e-mail address of the recipient in the To… field, add a message and send the picture.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager
34
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager
35
Publishing the model as a web page Any model created with Tekla Structures can be published for the Internet. Other persons can watch the model using any standard web browser (so Tekla Structures is not needed). This is an easy and effective way to show e.g. the current status of a model. Publish model as a web page
1. Select File > Publish as Web page… 2. Define a name for your web page file.
3. Click the Publish button. A separate Tekla Web Viewer window appears. Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager
36
4. Test the functions Pan, Rotate and Fly in Tekla WebViewer. See Help: System > Import and export > Tekla WebViewer. See Help: System > Import and export > Tekla WebViewer -> How to move and zoom? To e-mail a published model, zip the entire PublicWeb folder. Remember to use the folder structure. Then, attach the .zip file to an email message and send it to the recipient. The recipient can then unzip the files and save the contents. When you receive a zipped WebViewer model, ensure you keep the folder names when you unzip it. To open the model, double-click the index.html file.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager
37
1.8 Reports We will now check the marks assigned to parts, assemblies and cast units. Inquire part
1. Select Inquire > Object… 2. Select any column. The Inquire object dialog box opens. Now the steel columns have Part position and Assembly position numbers and concrete columns cast unit numbers (the position numbers may differ in your model).
We will next create assembly part list and cast unit list of the whole model. Help: Drawing > Printing > Printing reports > Producing reports on entire model Create assembly part list and cast unit list
1. Click on the Report icon to display the Report dialog box.
2. Select Assembly_part_list report template from the list.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager
38
3. On the Options tab, select the options as shown below.
4. Click Create from all to run a report on the entire model. The report is now automatically displayed in a dialog. Also the text file is created in the model folder.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager
39
5. Repeat the procedure above to create a cast unit list of the entire model. We will next create a cast unit list of all the concrete columns in our model. We will name the report with a specific name in order to keep the information on the stage of the project. To keep the report files you have created give them a specific name. If you try to create a report with the existing name, Tekla Structures asks before it overwrites the existing report.
Create cast unit list of concrete columns
1. Use the select filter COLUMN_CONCRETE to select all the concrete columns. 2. In the Report dialog box, edit report file name to read: cast_unit_list_COLUMN_.xsr. (See picture below.) 3. (Next time you create the cast unit list of columns just change the date)
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager
40
4. Click Create from selected. 5. The report is now displayed in a dialog box. 6. Select Tools > Open model folder to check that the actual text file appears in the model folder.
When you select a list entry that contains the ID numbers of the parts or assembly, Tekla Structures highlights them in the model.
Study different reports and check part marks Tekla Structures can produce many different reports from the information contained in the model. Study the available reports. You can also print the report with the Print option.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager
41
Create reports Create the following reports and check the model: x
Part_list - Check the plate thicknesses for abnormalities
x
Part_list - Check zero lengths of material
x
Part_list - Check the steel grades
x
Assembly_part_list - Check the main item profile (plates or flats may indicate incorrect welding)
x
Cast_list - Check the main item profile
x
Material_list – Check the grades used are correct
x
Rebar_schedule_FIN - Check the number and types of rebars
Other checks Here are some other ways to check your model: x
Clash check the entire model: Select parts (or entire model), Tools > Clash Highlight the clashing parts in the model by selecting lines in the clash list.
check.
x
Check the erect ability of precast members.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager
42
1.9 Drawings In Project Manager, you can open drawings from the drawing list, and check them.
You can use the drawing list to: x
select and open the drawings for viewing
x
display and filter drawings shown in the list
x
choose drawings to select parts in the model, or show only the drawings of the selected parts in the list (not available for GA drawings)
x
modify user-defined attributes of one or several drawings at a time.
The drawing list also displays the creation and modification dates of the drawings, drawing size and type, etc. In some cases, the drawings of the project are not on the drawing list, and the functionalities described above are not available to you. This depends on whether the company who has done the design wants to make the drawings available via Tekla Structures or not. Let's check some drawings. Check drawings
1. Open the first drawing on the list. 2. View the drawing. 3. Right-click on the drawing and select Properties… . 4. On the Drawing properties dialog, click User-defined attributes… . 5.
Mark your initials and the date of checking.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager
43
6. Click Modify and OK. 7. Press Ctrl + Page Down to open the next drawing on the list. 8. Repeat the checking (steps 2-6). 9. In the drawing list, scroll to the right to see the user-defined attributes.
You can also just view a number of drawings one by one (with Ctrl + Page Down or Page Up), then close the last one, and with Ctrl or Shift select all the viewed drawings on the list, right-click and change their attributes all at once.
Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager
44